See all Online Master's Degrees in Health
See all Master's Degrees in Engineering
Most searched curriculums
Official qualification
Madrid
Study the double degree that will allow you to learn about all aspects of the industrial product design process, combining mechanical engineering with the latest technologies to create innovative and functional solutions.
In collaboration with:
Because it combines the creativity of product design with the rigour of mechanical engineering, equipping you to develop innovative, functional and technically advanced solutions for industry.
25,000 M² from actual installations
A wind tunnel, a turbojet test rig, an Airbus A320 flight simulator, AeroLab and a FABLAB equipped with 3D printing, laser cutting and robotic arms.
99 % EMPLOYABILITY
99 per cent of our students are in employment upon graduation
90 % ACTIVE TEACHERS
This offers the student a training that is closer to professional reality.
1000 AGREEMENTS
Airbus Defence & Space, Iberia, Hispasat, Indra, Thales Alenia Space, INECO, Sacyr, Accenture, Capgemini, GMV, Swiftair, Air Europa and ELA Aviación, amongst others
+ 100 REAL PROJECTS
Take part in the development and actual launch of a microsatellite alongside the aerospace company B2Space, as part of the UAX FABLAB Makers programme.
The Bachelor’s Degree in Industrial Design and Product Development Engineering + Mechanical Engineering has been created in response to the needs of industry. Both degrees are in high demand amongst companies in the industrial sector, and this dual degree will open up a vast range of opportunities for your professional development.
Experience top-flight motorsport engineering from the pit lane
UAX is partnering with SeventyTwo Artbox Racing Team, a leading JuniorGP team renowned for its innovation and talent development. Thanks to this partnership, students take part in real-world engine engineering tasks within a professional pit.
Be part of the UAX SeventyTwo Artbox team in JuniorGP races like Montmeló or Valencia. Participate in real data, simulation and technical support tasks while you discover how a professional motorbike racing team works.
Participates in the development of aerodynamic parts for racing motorbikes: CAD design, simulation, prototyping and wind tunnel validation. An interdisciplinary experience where engineering comes to life.
Be part of a team working on engineering projects linked to the design, analysis, validation and optimisation of technical solutions inspired by the automotive and racing industry. You will learn to conceptualise, justify and implement ideas that respond to real challenges in the sector.
Degree in Industrial Design and Product Development Engineering + Degree in Mechanical Engineering
First Year
ANNUAL SUBJECTS
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0141511 | Analysis of Colour and Form | OB | 9 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Analysis of Colour and FormCódigo: 0141511 Imprimir Year 1. Annual module. Compulsory. 9 credits. Profesores
Objectives The main objective of the module is to teach students how to represent three-dimensional reality in two dimensions and to understand it, as well as how to use colour as a cornerstone in the creation of forms. Within the first year of the degree programme, the analysis of colour and form is an extremely important module, as the more tools you acquire in this module, the easier it will be for you to tackle the subsequent graphic design modules, given that freehand drawing and its various graphic expressions—whether line drawings or infographics—form the cornerstone of design practice. Any student who successfully masters the graphic subjects in the early years of the degree will find it easier to progress through the remaining years, as they will have a richer visual vocabulary. The very act of creating any work of art requires intellectual effort. The process of conceptualisation and its subsequent realisation as an artistic object is, in part, an attempt at communication. The creator, in giving form to the object, is constructing a message. The meaning contained within a work of art is, to a certain extent, a mystery to the recipient of that message. To uncover it, the recipient must ‘deconstruct’ or decode the elements that make up the message. They need to interpret the work of art, and to do so they must answer a series of questions: how was it made? Why does it have this shape and not another? What does it mean? This process is, in essence, the analysis of forms. Any work of art worth its salt must be governed by an indispensable principle: internal coherence. To achieve this, the creator must strike a balance between what they wish to express, the manner of expressing it, and the form that such expression must take. This is what we call artistic synthesis: harmony between meaning, expression and composition. The central objective will be the combination of different tools in a coherent work that fulfils the conditions set out above—aesthetics and the creation of space—using media appropriate to artistic expression. Prerequisites None Competencies 1. Practical knowledge of visual language. 2. Developing the ability to perceive the environment. 3. Understanding the basic elements of space (lines and planes) and how they interrelate to create more complex elements (structures) as a preliminary step to design. 4. Understand the principles of colour, basic theories of harmony and colour relationships, and their applications in relation to light and pigments. Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK1 Understands graphic and visual language and the tools of expression and representation in order to communicate and test designs. The tools mentioned will offer a broad scope for the fluid communication of concepts and designs. These tools encompass all the classic tools of artistic drawing, technical drawing and standardisation, preliminary models, scale models, as well as computer-aided graphic and industrial design. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RS1 Takes a holistic view of the various dimensions that come together in products: aesthetic, semiotic, functional, typological and technological, in order to make ideas tangible and bring product design concepts to life. RS2 Applies their knowledge to product design solutions by using drawing tools and specialised software to determine the most appropriate way to communicate their work to third parties, whether or not they are experts in the field, using conceptual or visual skills to communicate ideas and concepts in a clear and effective manner, whilst selecting the most appropriate media and content. COMPETENCIES RC1 Possesses the ability to create new products and services, drawing on engineering knowledge of the materials that make up the technological environment as a source of value, and the relationship between emotion and the product to create the optimal experience in the product-human-society interaction and to respond to society’s demand for products, concepts and services. This involves the ability to analyse, synthesise and make appropriate decisions in order to identify and resolve problems or practical cases based on given specifications. Description of the content Perception of the environment. Form: Basic elements of the visual arts. Visual and artistic language. Colour and chromatic harmonies. Light and colour. Surface and volume. Representational techniques. Artistic techniques. Analytical drawing. COLOUR Introduction to colour Chromatic harmonies I Colour wheel Value Tone Value Scales Saturation Chromatic Harmonies II. FORM Form: Basic elements of visual art. Form and colour: Analysis of the Old Masters Form and colour: modular grids. The module Form and Colour: Modular Networks. Square Grid Form and Colour: Modular Networks. Hexagonal Grid Form and Balance SURFACE AND VOLUME Surface area and volume Representation of objects: Analytical drawing. Material and process Representation of objects: Analytical drawing. Representation of volume Shape and Colour Laboratory: Modular Networks. Hexagonal Grid Analytical drawing. Representation of colour and light Representation of objects: Analytical drawing. Representation of colour and light. Artistic techniques: Charcoal Analytical drawing. Basic configurations. Artistic techniques: Charcoal Artistic techniques: Conté Artistic techniques: coloured pencils Artistic techniques: Pen and ink Artistic techniques: Marker pen Artistic techniques: Pastel Artistic techniques: mixed media Training activities AP2. Interactive classes AP3. Workshops/Practical sessions AP4. Project development and problem-solving AP5. Independent study, case studies, problem-solving and literature review. AP6. Tutoring AP7. Knowledge assessments Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s acquisition of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed learning outcomes has been achieved: SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 0% MAXIMUM 30% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 30% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 90% As this is a predominantly practical module, students wishing to pass the module must submit all the assignments set during the term and achieve an average mark of five points. Students who have not submitted all the exercises set for the module, or who, having submitted them, have not achieved an average mark of five points, must sit the standard/supplementary examination set by the university. This standard/supplementary examination will cover the entire syllabus of the module. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0141512 | Physics | FB | 9 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PhysicsCódigo: 0141512 Imprimir Year 1. Annual module. Foundation course. 9 credits. Profesores
Objectives Physics forms the basis of a large number of the technical subjects covered throughout any engineering degree programme. In this module, and throughout the course, we will establish the fundamental principles of physics, illustrating them with a variety of examples of their applications, with the aim of establishing a logical sequence between the laws of physics and their applications. The aim is therefore to develop students’ ability to analyse any physics problem related to engineering in a logical and straightforward manner, applying the basic principles they have learnt to solve such problems. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling students to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. C13 Understanding and mastery of the basic concepts relating to the general laws of mechanics, thermodynamics, fields and waves, and electromagnetism, and their application to solving engineering problems. Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK1 Understands and has a firm grasp of the basic concepts relating to the general laws of mechanics, thermodynamics, fields and waves, and electromagnetism, and their application to solving engineering problems. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RFS1 Has a firm grasp of the fundamentals of basic scientific and technical subjects necessary for solving problems that may arise in engineering within Industrial Design and Product Development. RS1 Solves problems by demonstrating initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and is able to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. COMPETENCIES RC1 Links mechanical problems to the physical phenomena that explain them in order to describe them in detail. Description of the course content Modules into which the course is divided. 1. Vector quantities. 2. Kinematics and dynamics of a particle. 3. Particle statics. Equilibrium of forces. 4. Work and energy. 5. Equilibrium of a rigid body. Geometry of masses. Centres of gravity. Statics. 6. Dynamics of rigid bodies. Moments of inertia. 7. Deformable solids. Elasticity. 8. Deformable solids. Introduction to the strength of materials. 9. Fluid mechanics. 10. Principles of thermodynamics. Heat transfer. 11. Wave motion. 12. Electrostatic fields. 13. Magnetic fields. Teaching activities TA 1. Lectures AP2. Interactive classes AP3. Workshops/Laboratories AP4. Project development and problem-solving AP5. Independent study, case studies, problem-solving and literature review. AP6. Tutoring AP7. Knowledge assessments Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- To pass this module through continuous assessment, students must: 1. Have completed the laboratory practicals. 2. Have sat the continuous assessment examinations. 3. Achieve a mark of five points or higher by adding together the percentages set out below: Laboratory practicals: 20% of the final mark Exams: 80% Divided into two four-month terms. In each term, students will be required to sit two assessment tests, the content of which will be specified in due course prior to the tests. The percentage contribution to the final mark is set out in the course timetable. 4. If this mark is not five points or higher out of ten, the student must sit a final exam, which will be predominantly practical and cover the content of the entire course. This exam will account for 100% of the mark. Students will have two opportunities to sit this exam: one during the regular examination period and another during the supplementary examination period, if necessary. The module may be passed either through continuous assessment or through a final examination (in the event that the student has not passed via continuous assessment). CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: The final mark for continuous assessment will be based on the marks obtained in the tests, questionnaires, seminars and laboratory practicals carried out during the course. The weightings are set out in the Timetable. REGULAR EXAM SESSION In the ordinary examination session, the entire syllabus of the module will be assessed, with the final mark being that obtained in the examination (weighting 100%). The examination will cover all the course content. If students have passed either the first or second term, they may be exempt from that part. SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION PERIOD: In the supplementary examination, the entire syllabus of the module will be assessed, with the final mark being that obtained in the examination (accounting for 100% of the mark). The examination will cover all course content. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0141513 | Mathematics | FB | 9 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
MathematicsCódigo: 0141513 Imprimir Year 1. Annual module. Foundation course. 9 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this module is to provide the necessary mathematical foundations to enable graduates in Industrial Design and Product Development to interpret, select, evaluate and create new concepts, theories, applications and technological developments relating to Industrial Design and Product Development. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling students to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the flexibility to adapt to new situations. SKILLS AND ABILITIES C12 Ability to solve mathematical problems that may arise in engineering. Ability to apply knowledge of: linear algebra; geometry; differential geometry; differential and integral calculus; differential and partial differential equations; numerical methods; numerical algorithms; statistics and optimisation. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK2 Is able to apply knowledge of: linear algebra, geometry, differential geometry, differential and integral calculus, differential equations, numerical methods, and numerical algorithms. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RFS1 Has a firm grasp of the fundamentals of basic scientific and technical subjects, necessary for solving problems that may arise in engineering within Industrial Design and Product Development. COMPETENCIES RK2 Possesses applied knowledge of: linear algebra, geometry, differential geometry, differential and integral calculus, differential equations, numerical methods, numerical algorithms; statistics and optimisation for solving the mathematical problems that may arise in engineering. Course content Derivatives of functions of one and several variables. Integration of functions of one variable. Matrices. Vector spaces. Linear applications. Algebraic structures. ODE (ordinary differential equations). Sequences. Series. Teaching activities AP1. Lectures AP2. Interactive classes AP3. Workshops/Laboratories AP4. Project work and problem-solving AP5. Independent study, case studies, problem-solving and literature review. AP6. Tutoring AP7. Knowledge assessments Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s acquisition of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed learning outcomes has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 30% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 45% MAXIMUM 65% SE3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 15% MAXIMUM 25% Students’ results in the modules will be marked according to the following numerical scale from 0 to 10, expressed to one decimal place, to which the corresponding qualitative grade may be added: a. 0–4.9: Fail (SS). b. 5.0–6.9: Pass (AP). c. 7.0–8.9: Good (NT). d. 9.0–10: Distinction (SB). The distinction ‘Honours’ shall be awarded to students who have obtained a mark of 9.0 or higher. The number of students awarded this distinction may not exceed five per cent of those enrolled on the course in the relevant academic year, unless the number of enrolled students is fewer than 20, in which case only one ‘First Class Honours’ may be awarded. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: To assess learning outcomes throughout the course, four mid-term exams are held, two in each term (Mid-term 1 and 2 in the first term, Mid-term 3 and 4 in the second term), corresponding to the four parts of the module. Each mid-term exam accounts for 18 per cent, and the four mid-term exams together account for 64 per cent of the continuous assessment mark. In addition, four assignments, challenge-based tasks and/or activities will be set – one for each of the four parts of the module – to be completed individually or in groups. Each assignment accounts for 5 per cent of the mark, and the four assignments together account for 20 per cent of the continuous assessment mark. In each term, a project is carried out during the practical sessions; each project accounts for 8 per cent of the mark, and the two projects (one per term) account for 16 per cent of the continuous assessment mark. The final mark for continuous assessment will be calculated by applying the percentages to all the continuous assessment tests carried out during the course as set out in the timetable, in accordance with the details provided above. The marks for the four mid-term exams will account for 64 per cent of the continuous assessment mark; the marks for the four assignments and activities will account for 20 per cent; and the marks for the two projects carried out during practical sessions will account for 16 per cent. The module may be passed BY CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT if a mark of 5 out of 10 or higher is achieved. Students who pass by continuous assessment will not sit the exam in the ordinary examination session. REGULAR JUNE EXAM SESSION: This exam, which will assess students’ competencies in line with the learning activities undertaken, will consist of two parts, one for each of the two semesters. The first part corresponds to mid-term exams 1 and 2 of the first term, and the second part corresponds to mid-term exams 3 and 4 of the second term. Students who have failed the continuous assessment may choose to sit the entire exam or just one of the parts (one of the two four-month terms) if they wish to retain the continuous assessment mark obtained in the other part (the other of the two four-month terms). If a student chooses to sit only half of the exam, they will be allowed half the time, and the mark obtained will be averaged with the continuous assessment mark for the other part. If students sit the full exam for the module, the mark recorded on their academic transcript will be the one obtained in the exam, and continuous assessment marks will not be taken into account. Under no circumstances will any course content be waived for the July sitting, nor will continuous assessment marks be carried over; if a student fails in the ordinary sitting, the entire module remains outstanding for the supplementary sitting. JULY EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSION: A single examination covering the entire syllabus will be held, in which students’ competencies will be assessed in a way that reflects the learning activities undertaken. The mark for this examination will be the one recorded in the academic records. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Bibliography Core: 1. Guervós Sánchez, Esther; García Nicolás, Begoña; González Rosales, Alfredo Introduction to Calculus García-Maroto Editores. 2008. ISBN: 9788493629984 2. Esther Guervós Sánchez, Ana Pastor Regidor Fundamentals of Mathematics: Theoretical Concepts and Solved Problems Bellisco. 2005. ISBN: 84-96486-14-1 Supplementary: 3.- de Mingo, Pedro Calculus Bellisco. 2009. ISBN: 8796486370 4. by Pedro Mingo Mathematics Bellisco. 2009. ISBN: 84-95279-90-8 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 27 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
FIRST FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0141514 | Technical Drawing | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Technical DrawingCódigo: 0141514 Imprimir Course 1: First-semester module. Foundation course. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The most significant features of the course in Metric Technical Drawing are its educational nature and the body of knowledge it provides, which is designed to develop a mental framework that, together with Mathematics and Physics, enables students to approach the study of the degree programme’s technology-related subjects with a solid foundation. Furthermore, it provides students with the basic knowledge required to define any geometric element or interpret any representation of such an element, in accordance with existing standards and using the drafting tools employed in industry. Through this course, students will be able to: - Build a knowledge base founded on spatial concepts and constructions. - Enhance their reasoning skills. - Improve their spatial visualisation skills. - Facilitate the calculation of areas and volumes of all types of shapes. - Be introduced to the procedures of projective geometry for the subsequent study of conic sections and surfaces. Prerequisites None required. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling students to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the flexibility to adapt to new situations. SKILLS AND ABILITIES C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. COMPETENCIES C16 Spatial awareness and knowledge of graphic representation techniques, both through traditional methods of metric and descriptive geometry, and through computer-aided design applications. Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK4 Knowledge of graphic representation techniques using traditional methods of metric geometry and descriptive geometry, as well as computer-aided design applications, to correctly produce, read, interpret and implement industrial technical drawings in a standardised, clear and precise manner, based on graphic representation systems as tools for spatial thinking. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RFS1 Has a firm grasp of the fundamentals of basic scientific and technical subjects necessary for solving problems that may arise in engineering within Industrial Design and Product Development. RS2 Uses systems of graphical representation, as well as the conventions and standards commonly used in industrial design engineering, to draw and on the appropriate medium, using both traditional methods of metric geometry and descriptive geometry, as well as computer-aided design applications, to produce manufacturing drawings, incorporating the technical information required for subsequent manufacture. Description of the content Graphical representation systems in engineering Geometric constructions on a plane Solid geometry Descriptive geometry Standardisation Computer-Aided Design (CAD) 1. Introduction to graphical representation in engineering and technical drawing. - Geometric constructions on a plane. - Introduction to Representation Systems. - Elements of Descriptive Geometry. BLOCK A: DIEDRIC SYSTEM. 2. DIEDRIC SYSTEM: - Point. - Line. - Plane. - Intersections. - Projections. - Parallelism and perpendicularity. - Distance. - Polyhedra. - Prisms. BLOCK B: STANDARDISATION AND VISUALISATION (Conventional representation of isolated parts with ideal geometry) 3. STANDARDISATION. - Standardised formats. - Scales. - Standardised views. - Projection methods. - Sections. - Dimensioning. 4. AXONOMETRIC PROJECTION. 5. HORSE-SHOE PERSPECTIVE. 6. CONICAL PERSPECTIVE. BLOCK C: COMPUTER-AIDED DRAWING. 7. COMPUTER-AIDED DRAWING: AutoCAD software. Training activities AP1. Lectures AP2. Interactive classes AP3. Workshops/Laboratories AP4. Project development and problem-solving AP5. Independent study, case studies, problem-solving and literature review. AP6. Tutoring AP7. Knowledge assessments Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- Students will be assessed on the basis of: Completion of practical work, the preparation of reports on the work carried out, the dedication and interest shown whilst undertaking it, as well as written tests relating to the experimental work. Solving set problems, submission and presentation of group work. Preparation of case studies. Practical examinations covering the content covered in the classroom-based learning activities. Assessment Methods The format of the assessment tests may include multiple-choice questions, short-answer questions, essay questions, problem-solving tasks, case studies, laboratory tests or workshops, or the design of prototypes, products or models, to be completed in writing or orally. Where applicable, the course coordinator will provide details of the assessment format to be used prior to the assessments taking place. Students’ results in the modules will be graded according to the following numerical scale from 0 to 10, expressed to one decimal place, to which the corresponding qualitative grade may be added: a. 0–4.9: Fail (SS). b. 5.0–6.9: Pass (AP). c. 7.0–8.9: Good (NT). d. 9.0–10: Distinction (SB). The distinction of ‘Honours’ shall be awarded to students who have obtained a mark of 9.0 or higher. The number of students awarded this distinction may not exceed five per cent of those enrolled on the course in the relevant academic year, unless the number of enrolled students is fewer than 20, in which case only one ‘First Class Honours’ may be awarded. Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 25% MAXIMUM 30% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 40% MAXIMUM 50% SE3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 40% CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: To calculate the student’s mark for continuous assessment, each block will be weighted as follows: 40% BLOCK A: DIHEDRAL SYSTEM: 15% FIRST DIHEDRAL MID-TERM EXAM. 20% SECOND DIHEDRAL MID-TERM. 5% SUBMISSION OF EXERCISES. 40% SECTION B: NORMALISATION AND VISUALISATION. 15% FIRST NORMALISATION MID-TERM EXAM. 20% SECOND MID-TERM EXAM ON STANDARDISATION. 5% SUBMISSION OF EXERCISES. 20% BLOCK C: COMPUTER-AIDED DRAWING. 15% AutoCAD ASSESSMENT. 5% SUBMISSION OF ASSIGNMENTS. In order to have marks from the different blocks averaged and to pass via continuous assessment, students must achieve at least a 3.5 in each block. If the mark obtained through this procedure is 5 or above, the student will have passed the module through continuous assessment. REGULAR EXAM SESSION: In the ordinary examination session, students have the following options available to them: A. They may retain the marks for the modules in which they have achieved a mark of 5 or above through continuous assessment and sit an examination in the subject(s) of the modules in which they have achieved a mark below 5. In order to calculate an average across the different modules and pass in the ordinary examination period, students must achieve at least a 3.5 in each module. B. Sit the examination for the entire subject; in this case, no minimum mark is required in any of the blocks to pass the subject. To calculate the mark for the ordinary examination session, each block will be weighted as follows: 40% BLOCK A: DIEDRIC SYSTEM. 40% SECTION B: STANDARDISATION AND VISUALISATION. 20% SECTION C: COMPUTER-AIDED REPRESENTATION. EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSION: In the ordinary examination session, students have the following options: A. They may retain the marks for those Blocks in which they have achieved a mark of 5 or above in the continuous assessment and sit the examination for the subject(s) in the Blocks in which they have achieved a mark below 5. In order to average the marks across the different blocks and pass in the ordinary examination session, students must obtain at least a 3.5 in each of the blocks. B. Sit the examination for the entire subject; in this case, no minimum mark applies to any of the blocks in order to pass the subject. To calculate the mark for the supplementary examination, each block will be weighted as follows: 40% BLOCK A: DIEDRIC SYSTEM. 40% SECTION B: STANDARDISATION AND VISUALISATION. 20% SECTION C: COMPUTER-AIDED REPRESENTATION. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0141515 | History of Design and Aesthetics | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
History of Design and AestheticsCódigo: 0141515 Imprimir Course 1: First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To understand the origins and development of the profession, both as an academic subject and as a potential source of inspiration for design projects. To explore the evolution of the discipline in a roughly chronological order, analysing the various theories and movements that have emerged from the Industrial Revolution to the present day. To gain an understanding of each period, with an emphasis on the development of these movements in the countries where they have been most prominent and influential. To familiarise oneself with the most important theorists, designers and works of each period. To understand the history of art. Prerequisites None Learning outcomes 1: To understand the origins and evolution of the profession, both as an academic subject and as a potential source of inspiration for design projects. 2: To understand the evolution of the discipline in a roughly chronological order, analysing the different theories and movements that have emerged from the Industrial Revolution to the present day. 3: To gain an understanding of each period, with an emphasis on the development of these movements in the countries where they have been most prominent and influential. 4: To be familiar with the most important theorists, designers and works of each period. Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK2 Understands the Fundamentals and Supporting Techniques of Design: Methodology of Industrial Design Engineering; Design thinking, Ergonomics, Anthropometry and Biomechanics; Fundamental Elements of Graphic Design; History of Design; Strategic and Operational Marketing, enabling students to make and justify decisions, communicate effectively and draw conclusions in the field of industrial design engineering in order to achieve optimal designs. SKILLS AND COMPETENCIES RS1 Takes a holistic view of the various dimensions that converge in products: aesthetic, semiotic, functional, typological and technological, in order to make ideas tangible and bring product design concepts to life. RS2 Applies their knowledge to product design solutions by using drawing tools and specialised software to determine the most appropriate way to communicate their work to third parties, whether or not they are experts in the field, using conceptual or visual skills to communicate ideas and concepts in a flexible and effective manner, whilst selecting the most appropriate media and content. RS4 Identifies specific opportunities based on an analysis of users’ real needs, signals and trends, transforming them into new solutions that deliver value in a sustainable and systematic manner. RS5 Possesses the tools, skills and knowledge required to transform relevant problems or opportunities into solutions that add value for users, businesses and society. COMPETENCIES RC1 Possesses the ability to create new products and services, drawing on engineering knowledge of the materials that make up the technological environment as a source of value, and the relationship between emotion and product to create the optimal experience in the product-human-society interaction and to respond to society’s demand for products, concepts and services. This involves the ability to analyse, synthesise and make appropriate decisions in order to identify and solve problems or practical cases based on given specifications. Description of the content Aesthetic ideas and their evolution. History of design. Aesthetics and functionality. Analysis of aesthetic ideas and categories and their evolution Products and cultural diversity. Training activities AP1 – Lectures Lecture-based sessions in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the field, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP4: Development of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a lecturer-led activity in which students must complete an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-world complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired knowledge and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 20% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 40% MAXIMUM 70% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 20% SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE4. – Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output), compiled in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course, is assessed with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place The course is passed on an annual basis through continuous assessment or by sitting the supplementary examination session organised by the university for this purpose. The continuous assessment system consists of three mid-term exams, each accounting for 25 per cent of the total mark. The final mid-term exam corresponds to the regular February exam. The remaining 25 per cent is based on assignments set during the course. Students who do not pass the course during the term must sit the resit examinations set by the university. This resit examination will cover the entire syllabus of the course, and none of the marks obtained during the term will be taken into account. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0141516 | Technical English for Engineers | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Technical English for EngineersCódigo: 0141516 Imprimir Course 1: First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To provide an introduction to engineering-specific English, particularly within the field of engineering, at a starting level of B1 and a target level of B2. To familiarise students with and expand their English vocabulary, particularly technical vocabulary related to their degree programme. To familiarise students with potential situations and texts related to engineering, with the aim of developing their comprehension and expression skills (both oral and written). Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK17 Understands the elements necessary to communicate in and understand the English language. Through the development of reading and listening comprehension, as well as oral and written expression. SKILLS RC14 Handles negotiations in professional settings, using strategies of verbal courtesy and argumentation to add value to teams. RC15 Acquires the necessary linguistic skills in technical English to read and write engineering-related documentation. RODS Develops effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to operate with integrity in the professional sphere. Course description The content of this module is designed to enable students to acquire the skills in reading comprehension, listening comprehension, oral production and written production that will allow them to function effectively in a professional context in English. The course will cover a combination of basic English language skills, including the study and refinement of language use in various everyday contexts, and technical English, involving the study of vocabulary and concepts specific to different fields of specialisation. Contents: Unit 1 Systems Vocabulary / Technology 1.1: Safety equipment • telecoms 1.2: Telecoms • satellites 1.3: Instructional verbs • marine • mechanics Grammar / Discourse 1.1: Cohesion 1.2: Relative pronouns 1.3: Present simple • imperative Unit 2 Processes Vocabulary / Technology 2.1: Applications of plastics 2.2: Process verbs 2.3: Process verbs, related nouns • gerunds Grammar / Discourse 2.1: ‘will’ for predictions 2.2: Present simple passive 2.3: Phrases used to refer to a visual Unit 3 Events Vocabulary / Technology 3.1: Aerospace • mechanics 3.2: Spacecraft LAS system 3.3: Noun suffixes • semi-technical vocabulary Grammar / Discourse 3.1: Present perfect v past simple • First and second conditional 3.2: Time clauses 3.3: Sequence markers Unit 4 Careers Vocabulary / Technology 4.1: Terms used in a CV 4.2: Semi-technical vocabulary • biomedical 4.3: Employment Grammar / Discourse 4.1: Present continuous for present and future • going to 4.2: Comparative • conjunctions 4.3: Present perfect v past simple • for, since, ago Unit 5 Safety Vocabulary / Technology 5.1: Control and warning systems 5.2: Maintenance • automotive 5.3: Navigation • air traffic Grammar / Discourse 5.1: Discussion markers 5.2: Active and passive modals 5.3: unless • present participle Unit 6 Planning Vocabulary / Technology 6.1: Deadlines • energy • environment 6.2: Nouns expressing actions • causal suffixes • fuel processing 6.3: Energy • power generation Grammar / Discourse 6.1: Future modals 6.2: due to, owing to, because (of), as a result of, caused by 6.3: Section markers in a talk Learning activities AP2. – Dynamic lessons Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which students undertake an in-depth study of a specific subject. These activities encourage students to engage in reflective and inquisitive participation. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each subject. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP4: -Preparation of assignments or projects and resolution of challenges This is a teacher-led activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired knowledge and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. 1. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT Two written assessments and one oral assessment, both at the end of the academic term. The continuous assessment scheme is supplemented by each student’s classwork and the teacher’s assessment. 1 written test throughout the academic year. a. A first mid-term exam: 30% b. A second mid-term test: 30% f. An oral examination (presentation on a topic of the student’s choice related to engineering) at the end of the academic term: 20% The topic of the oral presentation will be agreed in advance with the lecturer. g. Coursera course: 10% h. Class participation and attitude: 10% Each of the mid-term assessments will consist of exercises in: Listening Vocabulary/Terminology Reading Comprehension Grammar or Linguistic Structures Writing The dates of these tests will be announced in advance by the teacher. They will take place in the usual classroom, unless the teacher specifies otherwise at the time. IMPORTANT 1) It is compulsory to sit ALL the assessment tests scheduled during the continuous assessment period. It follows that any student who fails to sit any of the mid-term tests, WILL LOSE THE RIGHT TO CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT AND WILL BE REQUIRED TO SIT THE REGULAR EXAMINATION COVERING 100% OF THE COURSE, subject to the assessment criteria specified for that examination session. 2) If a minimum mark of 5 has been obtained in the oral presentation assessment as part of the continuous assessment, this mark will be retained for the ordinary and/or supplementary examination sessions. 3) The mark for the written examination will not be carried over in either case. 4) The final mark will be calculated according to the percentages mentioned above. The continuous assessment may be failed if the result of the calculation, when combined with the other assessments, is below 5. In this case, the student would have to sit the course examination in the January ordinary examination period, with the mark counting for 75 per cent (if they have a mark of at least 5 in the oral component of the continuous assessment and decide to carry it over to June) or for 100 per cent of the course mark. 5) If the mark for any of the skills (Listening, Vocabulary, Reading, Grammar) is below 3.5 at the end of the academic year, it cannot be included in the average. In this case, the final mark will be a maximum of 3. It follows from this that, if any skill is left unmarked – either because the student did not complete it (in the case of the written exam), or because they did not sit the exam (in the case of the written and/or oral exam) – no average will be calculated from the other skills, and the final mark will be a maximum of 3. 6) Students with a final average mark of 5 or above in continuous assessment will pass the module through the continuous assessment system. 7) Students must have an attendance rate of 70 per cent to be eligible for this assessment option. 2. REGULAR EXAMINATION PERIOD WITHOUT CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT AND SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION PERIOD 2.1 Exams: Students who are to be assessed on 100 per cent of the course content must sit the ordinary examination in February or the supplementary examination in June and/or July. The assessment criteria in this case will be as follows: Written exam: 75% Oral examination: 25% The written examination will cover the same skills as those outlined above for students on the continuous assessment scheme. The oral examination will consist of an individual presentation, as specified by the lecturer in due course, on engineering topics covered throughout the course. Details regarding the format of the presentation will be provided during the academic year. If the mark for any of the skills (Listening, Vocabulary, Reading, Grammar, Writing) is below 3.5, it cannot be included in the average. In this case, the final mark will be a maximum of 3. It follows that if any skill is left unmarked – either because the student did not complete it (in the case of the written exam) or because they did not sit the exam (in the case of the written and/or oral exam) – no average will be calculated from the other skills, and the final mark will be a maximum of 3. If a minimum mark of 5 has been obtained in the oral examination, this mark will be retained for the supplementary examination session should this be necessary, provided the student so requests. It is the student’s responsibility to find out about classrooms, dates and times. Type of examination 2.1.1 Written exam The written exam will consist of questions on listening comprehension, vocabulary, reading comprehension and grammar. The mark for the written exam will not be carried over to the resit session under any circumstances. 2.1.2 Oral exam This may be taken individually or in pairs, as indicated at the time. It will consist of an oral presentation or a dialogue on a given topic related to engineering. Each student will prepare their dialogue or presentation in advance, following the guidelines provided in class or via the course portal. On the day of the written exam, information regarding the dates, times and classrooms for the oral exams will be provided at the latest. Students will be asked to book a slot at the date and time that suits them best from among those set by the Faculty of Applied Languages. The oral exams may be recorded. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Reading list Core: 1. Bonamy, David Technical English, 2nd Edition, Level 3. Coursebook and eBook. Pearson. 2022. ISBN: 978-129242448 2. Jacques, Chris Technical English, 2nd Edition, Level 3. Workbook. Pearson. 2022. ISBN: 978-129242452 Supplementary: 3.- Murphy, Raymond English Grammar in Use (B1–B2). Fifth edition. Book with answers. C.U.P. 2019. ISBN: 9781108457651 4. Swan, Michael Practical English Usage: 4th ed. Oxford University Press. 2016. ISBN: 978-0-1942-02 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0141816 | Fundamentals of Chemistry in Engineering | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Fundamentals of Chemistry in EngineeringCódigo: 0141816 Imprimir Course 1: First-term module. Basic training. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives This module has two objectives: • Firstly, by undertaking a degree in engineering, students have chosen a career in which they will interact with the natural world, utilising its resources and transforming them. Understanding the basic laws of chemistry will enable them to grasp the key processes that allow us to extract these resources, convert them into materials or energy sources useful to humankind, and recognise the environmental implications that such activity may entail. Knowledge and understanding are the first steps towards applying these concepts and deriving satisfaction from professional practice. • Furthermore, many of the modules on the degree programme will build upon the skills already acquired through this course. The time spent studying chemistry should be seen as an investment that makes it easier to learn other subjects, particularly those related to materials and the environment. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies Basic and general competences CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling students to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. Specific competences CE4 Ability to understand and apply the principles of basic general, organic and inorganic chemistry and their applications in engineering. Learning outcomes RA1 To understand and apply nomenclature in organic and inorganic chemistry. LA2 Identify, understand and describe the basic chemical reactions that occur in the field of industrial engineering. LO3 Understand the properties of the different states of matter and relate them to the properties of materials. LO4 Be able to carry out experimental tests in the chemistry laboratory, as well as analyse, evaluate and interpret the results obtained. RA5 Be able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. Course content The course content will be delivered according to the following topics: TOPIC 1: Composition of matter. TOPIC 2: Chemical bonding. TOPIC 3: Nomenclature in organic and inorganic chemistry. TOPIC 4: States of matter. TOPIC 5: Chemical reactions. TOPIC 6: Thermochemistry. TOPIC 7: Aqueous solutions: water, solubility and colligative properties. TOPIC 8: Chemical equilibrium. TOPIC 9: Acid-base equilibria. TOPIC 10: Redox equilibria. TOPIC 11: Precipitation equilibria. TOPIC 12: Industrial chemistry. There will be 5 laboratory sessions: P1: Study of different types of chemical reactions. P2: Simple distillation. Density and acid-base indicators. P3: Preparation of aqueous solutions, pH measurement and neutralisation. P4: Observation of a chemical equilibrium. P5: Redox titration. Teaching activities A1 Classroom presentation of concepts related to the topics comprising each subject and problem-solving exercises to enable students to understand how to tackle them, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A2 Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems independently. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be categorised into three types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s individual study. - E2: Reports on laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). There are two official examination sessions: the ordinary and the supplementary. Ordinary examination period Students must achieve a mark of 5 points or higher. They may pass the module through continuous assessment. In this case, the final mark is the weighted average of the set of assessment activities detailed below: • Mid-term Exam 1. Accounts for 35% of the final mark. A mark of 4 points or higher is required to be included in the average. • Mid-term Exam 2. This accounts for 35% of the final mark. A mark of 4 points or higher is required to be included in the average. • Class activities. These account for 15% of the final mark. They include exercises, problems, presentations and individual and group assignments. • Laboratory practicals. These account for 15% of the final mark. This percentage is broken down into 10% of the mark, corresponding to an exam (a mark of 3.5 points is required to be included in the average), and 5% from an individual report. It is essential to have completed all practical sessions in order to be eligible to sit the exam. If a student does not achieve a mark of 5 points through continuous assessment, they will have the opportunity to demonstrate that they have met the learning objectives during the designated exam week, as notified for this purpose, as follows: • The student will sit an exam covering those sections in which they have not achieved a pass (mid-term exam 1, mid-term exam 2, and/or practical exam). • The mark obtained in the course activities and the mark for the laboratory report will be retained for the calculation of the final mark. Extraordinary examination session If a student fails to pass the module during the ordinary examination period, they may do so during the supplementary examination period. The criteria will be as follows: • Students will sit an exam covering the sections they have not passed (full theory exam (which includes the content of mid-term exams 1 and 2), and/or practical exam). • To calculate the final mark, the marks obtained for coursework and the laboratory report will be retained. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Bibliography Essential: 1. Chang, Raymond Essential Principles of General Chemistry Madrid: McGraw-Hill, 2020. ISBN: 9788448146269 2. Petrucci, Ralph H. General Chemistry : Addison-Wesley Iberoamericana. 2011. ISBN: 0201058138 Supplementary: 3.- Gutierrez Ríos, Enrique Inorganic Chemistry : Reverté. 1993. ISBN: 8429172157 Links National Hydrogen Centre – On 21 December 2007, a collaboration agreement was signed between the Ministry of Education and Science (now the Ministry of Science, Innovation and Universities) and the Regional Ministry of Education and Science (now the Regional Ministry of Education, Culture and Sport) of the Regional Government of Castile-La Mancha for the creation of the Consortium for the design, construction, equipping and operation of the National Centre for Hydrogen and Fuel Cell Technology Experimentation (CNH2). General Chemistry_PDF book – PDF book available for download. Formulation in organic and inorganic chemistry – Learning portal covering chemical elements, nomenclature and other topics that may be useful for studying the subject. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 24 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
SECOND FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0141517 | Communication for Success | OB | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Communication for SuccessCódigo: 0141517 Imprimir Course 1. Second-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives The module ‘Communication for Success’ is taught during the first-year term and is worth 3 credits. This course aims to equip students with the necessary tools to communicate successfully in spoken English within professional and academic contexts. To this end, it will explore in depth the correct use of spoken language (accuracy, coherence and appropriateness, lexical accuracy, vocabulary, and pronunciation, prosody), non-verbal language (gestures, posture, eye contact, etc.), as well as other aspects related to cultural differences and sociolinguistics. Prerequisites Not applicable Learning Outcomes COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 COMPETENCIES C4 Ability to solve problems using initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. C10 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK17 Understands the elements necessary to communicate in and understand the English language, through the development of reading and listening comprehension, as well as oral and written expression. COMPETENCIES RC14 Handles negotiations in professional settings by employing strategies of verbal courtesy and reasoning to add value to teams. RODS Develops effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to conduct oneself with integrity in the professional sphere. Course content The course will cover a combination of English language content, focusing on the study and refinement of language use in communicative contexts, and technical-academic English, covering vocabulary and concepts specific to the following areas of specialisation: Unit 1 – Business Unit 2 – Behavioural Science Unit 3 – Developmental Psychology Unit 4 – Science – How do the laws of science affect our lives? Unit 5 – Nutritional Science – How has science changed the food we eat? Unit 6 – Education – Is one path to success better than another? Unit 7 – Anthropology – How can accidental discoveries affect our lives? Unit 8 – Engineering – What are the consequences of progress? Learning activities AP2 – Interactive lessons Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which students undertake an in-depth study of a specific subject. These activities encourage students to engage in reflective and inquisitive participation. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each subject. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP4- : Development of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-led activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired learning and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the module and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and student on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the regular examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE4.- Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output), compiled in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course, is assessed with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place. SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 50% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 40% MAXIMUM 75% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 20% The assessment process will be carried out with the aim of achieving the learning outcomes set out in the course description. The assessments carried out will primarily evaluate two language skills (listening comprehension and oral expression). To assess these skills, the following tests will be set: • Vocabulary exercises (applied to oral presentation). • Preparation and delivery of presentations on topics relating to the workplace and academia. • Listening comprehension tests. • Speaking tests. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT Students will be assessed through continuous assessment, as follows: Mid-term test 1 (listening and vocabulary tests) (Total 25%): Final exam (listening and vocabulary tests) (25%): Oral presentations (40%) (If a student passes the oral test with a minimum mark of 5 in class, this mark will be retained for the main examination session) Completion of the UAX Skill School course: 10% IMPORTANT: Should a student have not sat any of the mid-term tests or fail them, the final exam in the ordinary examination session will account for 100% of the mark. In this case, students will be assessed as follows: Listening comprehension and vocabulary test 50% Oral presentation 50% Once all continuous assessment tests have been completed, if the overall average mark in any of these tests is below 2.5, no average will be calculated. In this case, the final mark will be a maximum of 3 and, therefore, the student must sit the corresponding ordinary examination session. FINAL EXAM: REGULAR EXAM SESSION WITHOUT CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT AND/OR SUPPLEMENTARY EXAM SESSION. Students will be assessed as follows: Listening comprehension and vocabulary test 50% Oral presentation 50% Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0141518 | Creativity. Basic Design | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Creativity. Basic DesignCódigo: 0141518 Imprimir Course 1. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The module ‘Creativity and Basic Design’ provides students with a theoretical foundation that will enable them to apply the principles and laws of composition and design in a practical and rational manner when creating industrial design products. The main objective of the module is for students to recognise and accept that creativity is not an innate human trait, but rather something that can be developed, practised and learnt as just another methodology within the design process, in the same way as sketching or three-dimensional modelling. To this end, various processes for stimulating creativity and their potential applications to a design project will be explored. The link to other project-based modules is key to students’ proper understanding of the different processes for stimulating creativity. Prerequisites Students must have completed the following modules: • Technical Drawing. • Analysis of Colour and Form. Competencies This module forms part of the ‘Product Design and Development’ course. The main competences related to the course that students will acquire are as follows: 1: Acquisition of knowledge and skills to combine: - aesthetic, relating to form, - functional aspects, relating to use, - constructional, relating to manufacturing, - logistical, relating to the distribution and disposal of objects that can be manufactured industrially. 2: Be able to communicate and adequately express the progress of their work to third parties, whether or not they are experts in the field. To this end, they must possess qualities such as the ability to summarise, the skill to structure their communication, and the capacity to defend their ideas and give public presentations. 3: To stimulate creativity. 4: Develop critical thinking skills, which will help them to select and discern, using sound judgement and reasoning, possible solutions or alternatives to a ‘design problem’. 5: Acquire management and decision-making skills that will equip them to: • Decision-making. • Teamwork. • Leadership. • Initiative and entrepreneurial spirit. 6: Acquire knowledge of tools for expression and representation in order to communicate and test designs. These tools will offer a broad scope for the fluid communication of concepts and designs. These tools encompass all the traditional methods of artistic drawing, technical drawing and standardisation, pre-models, scale models, etc. Within the most up-to-date disciplines of expression, graduates must be proficient in computer-aided modelling tools, rapid prototyping techniques, etc. 7: Acquires the ability to observe and evaluate different solutions to design problems. Learning outcomes This module forms part of the subject ‘Product Design and Development’. The main learning outcomes related to the subject are as follows: 1. Design and redesign of products that can be manufactured industrially, combining: - aesthetic aspects, relating to form, - functional aspects, relating to use, - structural aspects relating to manufacturing - logistical aspects, relating to the distribution and disposal of items that can be manufactured industrially. 2. Possesses the capacity for original creation, to respond to society’s demand for products, concepts and services. To this end, graduates must possess the ability to synthesise, enabling them to combine conceptual thinking with tangible, formal solutions. 3. They are able to communicate and express the progress of their work effectively to third parties, whether or not they are experts in the field. To this end, they must possess qualities such as the ability to synthesise information, the skill to structure their communication, and the capacity to defend their ideas and deliver public presentations. 4. They possess creativity. 5. They possess critical thinking skills, enabling them to select and discern, using sound judgement and reasoning, possible solutions or alternatives to a ‘design problem’. 6. Possesses management and decision-making skills that will equip them to • decision-making. • teamwork. • Leadership. • initiative and an entrepreneurial spirit. 7. The ability to observe and evaluate different solutions to design problems. 8. Proficiency in the tools of expression and representation to communicate and test designs. These tools encompass all the traditional methods of artistic drawing, technical drawing and standardisation, pre-models, scale models, etc. Within the most up-to-date disciplines of expression, graduates must be proficient in computer-aided modelling tools, rapid prototyping techniques, etc. Description of the content A. PRESENTATION TECHNIQUES: 1. Basic theory. 2. Ideation. 3. Explanatory drawing. 4. Surfaces and textures. 5. Light. 6. Context. B. TWO-DIMENSIONAL AND THREE-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN 1. Three-dimensional form. 2. The elements of three-dimensional design 4. Variations in design elements 3. Three-dimensional structure 5. Variations in structure 4. Three-dimensional texture C. APPLIED DESIGN 1. Introduction to basic and industrial design: concepts. 2. Creativity techniques. Learning activities The learning activities to be carried out to ensure that students acquire the intended competences during this module and are able to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: Type 1: Classroom presentations on concepts related to the modules comprising each subject and problem-solving exercises that enable students to learn how to tackle these concepts, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. Type 2: Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems independently. Type 3: Carrying out work in small groups outside the classroom. Type 4: Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. Type 5: Assessment tests. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University shall be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- In order to indicate the relative weighting of the assessment activities described, these can be categorised into two types: Type B: Reports on the progress of laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. Type C: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: 33.33% BLOCK A: PRESENTATION TECHNIQUES. 33.33% BLOCK B: TWO- AND THREE-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN. 33.33% SECTION C: APPLIED DESIGN In order to have marks from the different areas averaged and to pass via continuous assessment, students must achieve a mark of at least 3.5 in each area. If the mark obtained through this procedure is 5 or above, the student will have passed the module in the ordinary assessment period. REGULAR EXAMINATION PERIOD: In the ordinary examination period, the marks for the blocks in which the student has obtained a mark of 5 or above during the academic year will be retained, and the student will have to sit an examination in the subject(s) from the blocks in which they obtained a mark below 5. In order to calculate an average across the different subject areas and pass via continuous assessment, students must achieve at least a 3.5 in each subject area. Students who have not been able to pass through continuous assessment may sit the EXAM in the ordinary examination period, provided they have complied with the provisions of the Student Assessment Regulations. A practical examination will be held; for this purpose, students will be required to complete exercises similar in nature to those set during the course, to be carried out within the three-hour duration of the examination. For this reason, students must bring the necessary materials to the examination to be able to complete any such exercises. To calculate the mark for the supplementary examination, each section will be weighted as follows: 33.33% SECTION A: PRESENTATION TECHNIQUES. 33.33% SECTION B: TWO- AND THREE-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN. 33.33% SECTION C: APPLIED DESIGN. EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSION: In the resit session, the marks for those sections in which the student has achieved a mark of 5 or above during the academic year will be retained, and the student will be required to sit an examination in the subject(s) within the sections for which they achieved a mark below 5. In order to calculate an average across the different subject areas and pass via continuous assessment, students must achieve at least a 3.5 in each subject area. A practical examination will be held; for this, students will be asked to complete exercises similar in nature to those set during the academic year, to be carried out within the three-hour duration of the examination. For this reason, students must bring the necessary materials to the examination to be able to complete any such exercises. To calculate the mark for the resit, each section will be weighted as follows: 33.33% SECTION A: PRESENTATION TECHNIQUES. 33.33% SECTION B: THREE-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN. 33.33% SECTION C: APPLIED DESIGN. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0141519 | Fundamentals of Computing and Programming | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Fundamentals of Computing and ProgrammingCódigo: 0141519 Imprimir Course 1. Second-term module. Foundation course. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives • To build a foundation of knowledge and skills based on the optimal use of IT resources and tools designed for academic, educational and professional purposes. • To foster information and knowledge management skills. • To establish a useful foundation for management and learning based on independent research using IT tools. • The ability to apply general knowledge of office automation and new information technologies in current practice and in future professional contexts. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been established Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling students to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the flexibility to adapt to new situations. C14 Basic knowledge of the use and programming of computers, operating systems, databases and software applications in engineering. Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RFK2 Possesses the foundations to begin exploring, organising and analysing data in order to extract knowledge from it and make predictions with the aim of identifying new business areas which, aided by this type of decision-support technology, may lead to innovative products and services that enhance the competitiveness of businesses. RK3 Basic knowledge of the use and programming of computers, operating systems, databases and software applications relevant to engineering. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RFS1 Has a firm grasp of the fundamentals of basic scientific and technical subjects, necessary for solving problems that may arise in engineering within Industrial Design and Product Development. COMPETENCIES RC3 Links the resources offered by programming languages with the requirements expressed in natural language to develop simple programmes. Description of the content Computer Architecture Programming Operating systems Classes and objects Control statements. Exceptions Arrays Files Information systems, data analysis and retrieval, etc. Document Documents. Document layout using applications and creation of templates and styles. Input, handling, organisation and filters on data. Types of charts, options and features of data charts. Creation and configuration of a . Integration and manipulation of digital images. Training activities AP1 – Lectures Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the subject, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, providing an in-depth study of a specific subject. These encourage reflective and inquisitive participation from students. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and shared. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and hands-on skills and abilities relating to a specific topic. AP4: Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-guided activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired learning and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the regular examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- SE1. Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows assignments and/or exercises to be submitted via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. SE4. – Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) is assessed; this evidence is compiled in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place. Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 25% MAXIMUM 35% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 40% MAXIMUM 60% AS3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 15% MAXIMUM 30% Continuous Assessment For the continuous assessment of the Computer Science module, various computer-based exercises and practical case studies will be carried out; a class attendance rate of over 60 per cent will be required; and the following practical examinations will be held (for which a minimum mark of 4 is required): - Applied Computer Science, 50% (25%+25%) - Programming Concepts: 50% (20%+30%) Students who meet the attendance and minimum mark requirements will have the percentages indicated for each part applied to their marks, and their final course mark will be calculated accordingly. Students who ultimately achieve a mark of 5 or above in the continuous assessment will have passed the course and will not be required to sit the final exam in the ordinary examination session. Ordinary Examination Students who have not passed the course will be required to sit the final exam in the ordinary examination session, for which there are two options: - Students who have met the continuous assessment requirements but have not passed the course may sit an exam in June for only one of the course components (Basic Computing or Programming, in which they must achieve a minimum mark of 4), so that, by re-applying the relevant weightings together with the mark for the resat part, they may achieve a final pass (a mark of 5 or above) in the ordinary examination session. - Students who do not fall into the above category will have to sit an exam covering the entire syllabus of the module during the ordinary examination period. Extraordinary Examination In the supplementary examination session, students must be examined on the entire syllabus of the module. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0141819 | Electrical Engineering and Electrical Machinery | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Electrical Engineering and Electrical MachineryCódigo: 0141819 Imprimir Course 1. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives This module provides an initial introduction to the core content of Circuit Theory. The aim is to provide students with a broad and in-depth understanding of electrical engineering in general. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 The ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, which, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this order, are aimed at the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG7 The ability to analyse and assess the social and environmental impact of technical solutions. CG8 Ability to organise and plan within the context of a company, and other institutions and organisations. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the relevant legislation in the practice of the profession of Industrial Technical Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE12 Knowledge and application of the principles of circuit theory and electrical machinery. Learning outcomes RA1 Design and analyse single-phase and three-phase electrical circuits, both direct current and alternating current, ensuring their operation and safety. LA2 Understand the principles governing the operation of electrical machines. LR3 Apply the principles of electromagnetism to electrical machines LA4 Is able to design, simulate and construct electrical circuits in the laboratory, obtain results and draw conclusions from them. LA5 Be able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. Course content Topic 1. Analysis of direct current circuits. Topic 2. – Analysis of single-phase alternating current circuits. Topic 3. Analysis of three-phase alternating current circuits. Topic 4: Introduction to electrical machines. Learning activities A1 Classroom presentation of the concepts relating to the topics comprising each subject and problem-solving exercises enabling the students to understand how to tackle them, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A2 Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems independently. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria "Assessment tests may take the form of multiple-choice questions, short-answer questions, essay questions, problem-solving exercises, case studies, laboratory tests or workshops, or the design of prototypes, products or models, to be completed in writing or orally. Where applicable, the course coordinator will provide details of the assessment format to be used prior to the assessments taking place.” ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be categorised into three types: - E1: Written assessments throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s independent study. - E2: Reports on laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Continuous Assessment To pass the course, students must have sat all assessments and completed each and every one of the assignments and assessable exercises. Failure to meet this requirement will result in a mark of NP for continuous assessment. For students who meet the attendance requirements, the percentages indicated for each component will be applied to calculate the final mark for the academic year. Students who ultimately achieve a mark of 5 or above in the continuous assessment will have passed the course and will not be required to sit the final exam in the ordinary examination session. Ordinary Examination Students who have not passed the course will be required to sit the final exam in the ordinary examination session, covering the entire syllabus of the module. Extraordinary Examination During the supplementary examination period, students must be examined on the entire syllabus of the module. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Reading list Core: 1. Carlson, A. Bruce Circuit Theory: Engineering, Concepts and Analysis of C Australia: Thomson, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 0634370977 2. Dorf, Richard C. Introduction to Electric Circuits 2nd ed. New York: John Wiley. 1993. ISBN: 0471574511 3. Fitzgerald, A. E. Electrical Machines 6th ed. Mexico City: McGraw-Hill Interamericana, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 970104052X 4. Fraile Mora, J. Jesús Electromagnetism and Electrical Circuits 3rd ed. Madrid: College of Civil Engineers. 1995. ISBN: 8474931312 5. Fraile Mora, J. Jesús Electrical Machines 3rd ed. Madrid: Association of Civil Engineers. ISBN: 8474931436 6. Fraile Mora, J. Jesús Electrical Machines 5th ed. Madrid: McGraw-Hill Interamericana de España, 200. 2004. ISBN: 8448139135 7. Gómez Expósito, Antonio Solved Problems in Circuit Theory 2nd ed. Madrid: Paraninfo, 1994. 1994. ISBN: 8428317860 8. Ortega Gómez, Guillermo Solved Problems in Electrical Machinery Madrid: Thomson, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8497320700 9. Ras Oliva, Enrique Circuit Theory: Fundamentals 4th ed. Barcelona: Marcombo, 1987. 1987. ISBN: 8426706738 10. Sanz Feito, Javier Electrical Machines Madrid: Prentice Hall, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 8420533912 11. Simón Rodríguez, María Antonia Circuit Analysis: Solved Problems Madrid: Editorial Vision Net. 2005. ISBN: 8498212200 12.- Valentín M. Parra Prieto... [et al.] Circuit Theory (Industrial Engineering) Teaching Module 7th ed. Madrid: National University of Distance Education. ISBN: 8436219503 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 21 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Second Year
FIRST FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0241511 | Materials Science and Engineering | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Materials Science and EngineeringCódigo: 0241511 Imprimir Year 2, Course 2. First term. Foundation module. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this module is to enable students to acquire the theoretical and practical knowledge required for the study and evaluation of the composition, microstructure and properties of materials. The course will cover the study and identification of the microstructure of materials. Properties, applications and in-service behaviour of metallic materials, polymers and plastics, ceramics and composites. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set Learning Outcomes COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling students to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the flexibility to adapt to new situations. C20 Knowledge of the fundamentals of science, technology and materials chemistry. Understanding the relationship between microstructure, synthesis or processing, and the properties of materials. SKILLS AND ABILITIES C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. C8 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. COMPETENCIES C36 Knowledge and skills for the application of materials engineering. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK8 Understands the scientific foundations of materials science, technology and chemistry, and the relationship between microstructure, synthesis or processing and the properties of materials, for subsequent application to the selection of materials. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RFS2 Selects existing or emerging industrial technologies, manufacturing processes and materials that add value to the proposed products, taking into account optimisation, sustainable production and economic viability. COMPETENCIES RC6 Selects materials for the design of components and products to meet specifications and processing requirements by applying the appropriate methodology. Course content description Course structure Material properties: physical and chemical, mechanical, thermal, electrical and magnetic, optical and acoustic Materials description: Relationship between material, form and process Mechanical properties of materials Parameters and criteria for material selection. Block I: Ferrous alloys – Steels. Block II: Corrosion. Module III: Non-ferrous alloys. Module IV: Ceramic, polymer and composite materials Training activities AP1 – Lectures Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the field, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which an in-depth study of a specific subject is carried out. These encourage reflective and inquisitive participation from students. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and practical skills and abilities relating to a specific subject area. AP4: Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-guided activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired learning and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT The assessment process will be carried out taking into account the various competences. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered: • Assessment of reports on various practical case studies set for students to solve by applying the knowledge acquired in the different subjects. • Completion of laboratory practicals, submission of detailed reports, participation and performance in the laboratory, and an assessment examination. • Oral and written tests designed to assess the learning process, in order of increasing difficulty, which progressively assess the competences the student has acquired as the course progresses. • Written examinations that comprehensively assess the skills, knowledge and competences acquired by the student. Students may pass through continuous assessment, for which it is compulsory to undertake the practical sessions, which are marked according to the following criteria: Theoretical component: 70%. ---------------------- First mid-term exam 35% Second mid-term exam 35% The module will be passed on the basis of the mid-term exams if the weighted average is above 5 (provided that the mark for each mid-term exam is greater than 4). If the mark for one mid-term exam is below 4 and the overall average is less than 5, marks from the other two mid-term exams may be excluded if the mark is 5 or above. Laboratory work 15%. ----------------------- Practical activities 15%. ----------------------- The student’s final mark will be the weighted average of the continuous assessment, the mark for the practical laboratory course and the mark for the practical activities. To pass via continuous assessment, students must achieve a minimum mark of 4 in any of the assessed components. In the final exam for the ordinary examination session, students are assessed on the entire course (questions and exercises from the theoretical syllabus, seminar assignments and laboratory practicals); only if the practicals have been passed will the practicals mark be retained, and it will not be necessary to sit the exam for this part during the ordinary examination session. REGULAR EXAMINATION SESSION (100%) Students who fail the continuous assessment will have to pass the module by sitting a final examination covering the content of the entire module: lectures, seminars and practicals. If they have passed the practicals assessment, their practicals mark will be retained and they will not have to sit this part of the final examination. SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION (100%) In the ordinary examination session, an exam will be held covering the content of the entire module: lectures, seminars and practicals. In this session, no part of the module is carried over. No part of the module is carried over to this sitting. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0241512 | Statistics | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
StatisticsCódigo: 0241512 Imprimir Year 2, Course 2. First term. Foundation module. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To understand the basic concepts, principles and techniques of statistics. To apply statistical techniques to problem-solving. To become familiar with the terminology specific to statistics. To analyse the relationships between statistics and other branches of science and technology Prerequisites Differential and integral calculus Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling students to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the flexibility to adapt to new situations. SKILLS AND ABILITIES C12 Ability to solve mathematical problems that may arise in engineering. Ability to apply knowledge of: linear algebra; geometry; differential geometry; differential and integral calculus; differential and partial differential equations; numerical methods; numerical algorithms; statistics and optimisation. COMPETENCIES C4 Ability to solve problems using initiative, decision-making and creativity, as well as critical reasoning, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RFK2 Possesses the foundations to begin exploring, organising and analysing data in order to extract knowledge from it and make predictions with the aim of identifying new business areas which, aided by this type of decision-support technology, may lead to innovative products and services that enhance the competitiveness of companies. RK2 Possesses applied knowledge of: linear algebra, geometry, differential geometry, differential and integral calculus, differential equations, numerical methods, numerical algorithms; statistics and optimisation for solving the mathematical problems that may arise in engineering. SKILLS AND COMPETENCIES RFS1 Has a firm grasp of the fundamentals of basic scientific and technical subjects necessary for solving problems that may arise in engineering within the fields of Industrial Design and Product Development. COMPETENCIES RC2 Applies the appropriate mathematical methods to solve each type of problem that may arise in industrial design engineering, for decision-making, communication and drawing conclusions in the field of engineering Course description Probability theory. One-dimensional random variables Parametric estimation. Regression and correlation. Sampling. Analysis of variance. Confidence intervals. Hypothesis testing. Introduction to multivariate analysis. ANOVA Hypothesis testing. Computer applications related to statistics. Training activities AP1 – Lectures Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the subject, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which an in-depth study of a specific subject is carried out. These encourage reflective and inquisitive participation from students. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and practical skills and abilities relating to a specific topic. AP4: Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-guided activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired learning and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the module and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, according to their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the degree to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. The format of the assessment tests may include multiple-choice questions, short-answer questions, essay questions, problem-solving tasks, case studies, laboratory tests or workshops, or the design of prototypes, products or models, to be completed in written or oral form. Where applicable, the coordinator will provide details of the assessment format to be used prior to the assessments taking place. REGULAR EXAM SESSION Two written theoretical and practical assessments will be held during the term. In order to pass the module through continuous assessment (without sitting the official examination in the ordinary examination period), students must meet three requirements: 1. Achieve a mark of 5 or above in both assessments. 2. Complete the prescribed practical work. 3. Attend classes regularly (attendance of over 70 per cent). If the student meets the three requirements set out above, the final mark for the module will be calculated as follows: 1. The results of the written theoretical and practical tests, each carrying a weighting of 45 per cent. 2. The practical work carried out, accounting for 10%. If a student fails to meet at least one of the three requirements, they will sit an examination covering the entire syllabus on the official date set for the final examination of the ordinary examination session. In this case, the final mark will be that obtained in the examination of the ordinary examination session. EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSION Only the mark from the examination in the supplementary examination period will be taken into account. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0241513 | Computer-Aided Design. CAD | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Computer-Aided Design. CADCódigo: 0241513 Imprimir Year 2 Course. First semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives Proficiency in using tools for generating 3D models and creating designs. Development of a general understanding of the computer systems integrated into the process of design and development of a product. Students will acquire the technical knowledge required for the correct creation, interpretation, basic analysis and optimisation of a design from the perspective of model generation and drawings for development and manufacture, with the aim of meeting the requirements of the application. PREREQUISITES Knowledge of the following subjects: Technical Drawing and Computer-Aided Design. SKILLS Proficiency in using computer software enabling the candidate to work with a CAD programme. Knowledge of and proficiency in using a computer programme for the graphical representation of the design, as well as the formal documentation of the analysis and graphical representation of the project. Knowledge of and proficiency in using current tools specifically designed for 2D and 3D representation. Ability to identify and resolve mechanical design problems based on specifications provided by the client, and translating these into a design drawing. Teamwork LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Proficiency in 2D and 3D CAD systems. Proficiency in a computer-aided design tool for the graphical representation of the design, as well as the formal documentation of the analysis and graphical representation of the project. 2. Production of detailed product drawings using CAD systems. 3. Creation of virtual product models. 4. Creation of realistic aesthetic renderings of the designed products and their intended environment. 5. Solving mechanical design problems based on specifications provided by the client, and translating these into a design drawing. 6. Proficiency in CAD/CAM systems. 7. Generating computer-generated imagery in the fields of material modelling, lighting and rendering. 8. Effectively communicating the added value of the designed product through photorealistic renders. 9. The ability to work independently on any project, adapting to the constant software updates that occur in the market. Course content Introduction to Fusion 360: • Familiarisation with the user interface and basic commands. • Configuring the workspace and managing projects in the cloud. • Navigating and customising the environment. Basic 3D Modelling: • Creating 2D sketches and using geometric constraints. • Extrusion, revolution and basic solid modelling operations. • Using modification tools such as fillet, chamfer and shell. Parametric and Direct Modelling: • Parameter-based design and the importance of relationships in designs. • Modifying models using direct modelling techniques. Surfaces and Shape Modelling: • Creating and editing complex surfaces. • Using T-Splines for modelling organic shapes. Assemblies and Motion: • Creating and managing assemblies. • Defining relationships between components and simulating motion. Generating Technical Drawings: • Creating detailed drawings from 3D models. • Annotations, dimensions and exploded views. Rendering and Visualisation: • Configuring materials, lighting and cameras for realistic renderings. • Exporting images and videos for presentations. 3D Printing and Rapid Prototyping: • Preparing models for 3D printing. • Exporting STL files Assessment system and criteria In implementing this section, technical instruction IT059 (Regulations for undergraduate degree programmes) of the Quality Management System has been taken into account. The learning activities to be carried out to ensure that students acquire the intended competences during this module and are able to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be Type 1: Classroom-based presentation of concepts related to the subjects comprising each subject and problem-solving exercises that enable students to understand how to tackle these issues, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. Type 2: Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty that enable students to gradually acquire the ability to solve problems independently. Type 3: Carrying out group work in small groups outside the classroom. Type 4: Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out carried out independently by a student or group of students. Type 5: Assessment tests. Practical activities 70% Practical work 40% Final project 30% Final knowledge tests 30% First mid-term exam 15% Second mid-term exam 15% Assessment will be continuous and will include mechanisms for students to make up for any knowledge and skills not acquired during the course period. To pass the module, students must achieve a mark of 5 or above, and no lower than 3, in each component. In the REGULAR EXAM SESSION, students may choose to sit exams only for those sections in which they do not meet the above requirements. In the EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSION, students must sit an examination covering the entire syllabus. The format of the assessment tests may include multiple-choice questions, short-answer questions, essay questions, problem-solving exercises, case studies, laboratory tests or workshops, or the design of prototypes, products or models, to be completed in writing or orally. Where applicable, the coordinator will provide details of the assessment format to be used prior to the examinations taking place. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0241514 | Graphic Engineering | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Graphic EngineeringCódigo: 0241514 Imprimir Year 2, Course 2. First term. Foundation module. 6 credits. Profesores
Aims The aim of this module is to provide students with the knowledge required to produce and interpret technical drawings specific to engineering, with an emphasis on the technical drawing of mechanical parts and assemblies. To this end, and as specific objectives, throughout the course, students will... - Develop their ability to visualise ideal geometric shapes and relate them to one another mentally. - Learn the elements of standardisation and the principles of representation commonly used in engineering. - Acquire the skills required to produce graphical representations, ranging from quick sketches to detailed manufacturing drawings. - Understand the role of graphic expression within the broader context of technical communication in engineering. - Understand the difference between the ideal and actual geometry of objects. - They will practise the skills acquired as a means of realising and communicating their own spatial creativity. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. COMPETENCIES C16 Spatial awareness and knowledge of graphic representation techniques, both through traditional methods of metric geometry and descriptive geometry, and through computer-aided design applications. C30 Knowledge and skills to apply graphic engineering techniques. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK4 Knowledge of graphic representation techniques using traditional methods of metric geometry and descriptive geometry, as well as computer-aided design applications, to correctly produce, read, interpret and implement industrial technical drawings in a standardised, clear and precise manner, based on graphic representation systems as tools for spatial thinking. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RS2 Uses graphic representation systems, as well as the conventions and standards commonly used in industrial design engineering, to draw, on the appropriate medium, using both traditional methods of metric geometry and descriptive geometry, as well as computer-aided design applications, to produce manufacturing drawings, incorporating the technical information required for subsequent manufacture. COMPETENCIES RFC3 Possesses the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. Course content Standardisation in industry and industrial draughting Assembly drawings, exploded perspective views and dimensioned exploded views Threaded joints Shafts. Keys and splines. Bearings. Gears Welding: types of joints, representation and designation Surface conditions Dimensional tolerances and fits. Geometric tolerances. 1. Standardisation in industry and in technical drawing. Standard paper sizes and the presentation of graphic elements on drawing sheets. 2. Assembly drawings, exploded perspective views and dimensioned exploded views. 3. Manufacturing processes. 4. Threaded joints. Elements of a thread. Profiles, representation and dimensioning. 5. Shafts. Keyways and splines. 6. Bearings. Types, assembly and fixing. 7. Lubrication. Sealing rings. 8. Gears: calculation, types, representation and dimensioning. 9. Tension, compression and torsion springs. 10. Welding: types of joints, representation and designation. 11. Dimensional tolerances and fits. Geometric tolerances. Surface finishes. Learning activities The learning activities designed to enable students to acquire the intended competences throughout this module and to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: AP1. – Lectures Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the subject, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which students undertake an in-depth study of a specific subject. These activities encourage reflective and inquisitive participation from students. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and hands-on skills and abilities relating to a specific topic. AP4: Preparation of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-guided activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired learning and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- To obtain the credits for the modules, students must have passed the corresponding examinations or assessment tests. The level of learning achieved by students will be expressed as numerical marks. Students’ results in the modules will be graded according to the following numerical scale from 0 to 10, expressed to one decimal place, to which the corresponding qualitative grade may be added: a. 0–4.9: Fail (SS). b. 5.0–6.9: Pass (AP). c. 7.0–8.9: Good (NT). d. 9.0–10: Distinction (SB). The distinction ‘Honours’ shall be awarded to students who have obtained a mark of 9.0 or higher. The number of students awarded this distinction may not exceed five per cent of those enrolled on the course in the relevant academic year, unless the number of enrolled students is fewer than 20, in which case only one ‘First Class Honours’ may be awarded. SE1.—Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 25% MAXIMUM 30% SE2 Final knowledge tests MINIMUM 40% MAXIMUM 50% SE3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 40% • Assessment will be continuous and will include mechanisms for students to make up for any knowledge and skills not acquired during the course period. Assessment Criteria: 1). Continuous Assessment: A). Theoretical/Practical Component Test 1: 25% Test 2: 25% Test 3: 25% Test 4: 25% Minimum mark for each test: 3 Classwork/exercises: The average mark obtained will count for up to 1 extra mark on top of the weighted mark for the tests The mark obtained from the tests and in-class exercises will account for 100% of the total mark for the module 2) Ordinary Assessment Period: Students who do not pass the course through continuous assessment will sit a final exam covering the theoretical and practical aspects of the course, which will account for 100 per cent of the final mark. 3) Supplementary Examination: Students who do not pass the course through continuous assessment will sit a final examination covering the theoretical and practical aspects of the course, which will account for 100 per cent of the final mark. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0241515 | Design Methodology. Design Thinking | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Design Methodology. Design ThinkingCódigo: 0241515 Imprimir Year 2 Course. First semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives Design Methodology provides a range of techniques aimed at honing the designer’s creative abilities. It is intended to provide criteria, structure and common sense to the professional activities of design specialists throughout the various stages of the design process. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies The Design Methodology module forms part of the subject ‘Methodological Techniques in Support of Design’. The following learning outcomes are envisaged for this subject: 1: To understand the working methodology that provides criteria, structure and common sense for the professional activities of industrial design specialists. 2: To understand the techniques aimed at refining the designer’s creative ability. 3: To understand the process of perception, as well as the tools related to perception. 4: To understand the tools required for problem-solving. 5: To acquire knowledge enabling students to observe and make judgements about different solutions to design problems. 6: To understand human behaviour in relation to the physical environment surrounding them. 7: Understand the ethical and environmental commitments involved in practising the profession. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK2 Understands the Fundamentals and Techniques Supporting Design: Methodology of Industrial Design Engineering; Design thinking, Ergonomics, Anthropometry and Biomechanics; Fundamental Elements of Graphic Design; History of Design; Strategic and Operational Marketing, enabling students to make and justify decisions, communicate effectively and draw conclusions in the field of industrial design engineering to achieve optimal designs. SKILLS AND COMPETENCIES RS1 Takes a holistic view of the various dimensions that converge in products: aesthetic, semiotic, functional, typological and technological, in order to make ideas tangible and bring product design concepts to life. RS3 Applies the fundamentals of social innovation and user-centred design through user analysis in industrial design engineering projects to support the professional development of the industrial design engineer. RS4 Identifies current and future opportunities for the various stakeholders (users, clients, suppliers) in order to define the specifications for new products and services or to launch new businesses. RS5 Possesses the tools, skills and knowledge necessary to transform relevant problems or opportunities into solutions that add value for users, businesses and society. COMPETENCIES RC1 Possesses the ability to create new products and services, drawing on engineering knowledge of the materials that make up the technological environment as a source of value, the relationship between emotion and the product to create the optimal experience in the product-human-society interaction and to respond to society’s demand for products, concepts and services. This involves the ability to analyse, synthesise and make appropriate decisions in order to identify and resolve problems or practical cases based on given specifications. RC3 Possesses the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. RODS Develops effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, enabling students to conduct themselves with integrity in the professional sphere. Course content description Design methodology. Methodological tools: Agile methodologies Creativity techniques applied to the methodological in design engineering: Design Thinking, Visual Thinking. Double Diamond Collaborative UX methodologies Techniques to support the design process 1. General concepts. Description of the nature of design in engineering. Areas of design. Methodology as a strategy in product design. 2. The creative process. Agile methodologies. 3. Problem analysis techniques. 3.1 – Interviews and questionnaires. 3.2 – Visual and functional inconsistencies. 3.3.- Literature review. 3.4- Usage requirements. 4. – Solution-finding techniques. 4.1 – Clearing the mind. 4.2 – Brainstorming. 4.3. Synectics. 4.4 – Controlled form creation. 4.5. Functional analysis. 4.6. – Morphological charts. 5. – Evaluation techniques. 5.5.- Economic analysis and single-criterion evaluation. 5.6. Multi-criteria decision-making. 6. Reliability techniques. 6.1.- Preliminary risk analysis. 6.2.- Failure modes and effects analysis. Training activities The training activities to be carried out to ensure that students acquire the intended competences during this module and are able to achieve the expected outcomes of the work undertaken will be: AP1.- Lectures Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the subject, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2.- Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which students undertake an in-depth study of a specific subject. These activities encourage reflective and inquisitive participation from students. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP4: -Preparation of assignments or projects and resolution of challenges This is a teacher-led activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired knowledge and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, supplementing their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, according to their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows assignments and/or exercises to be submitted via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE4.- Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) collected in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course is assessed, with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place. Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 40% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 50% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 40% Continuous Assessment Throughout the course, students’ progress will be monitored in the following areas: 40% THEORETICAL SECTION: To assess this part of the module, two mid-term exams will be held, weighted as follows: 20% corresponds to the first mid-term exam. 20% corresponds to the second mid-term exam. For these percentages to apply, students must sit all the theory examinations. The final examination will include a theoretical component for those students who have failed the THEORETICAL SECTION. 60% PRACTICAL SECTION: Throughout the course syllabus, students will undertake several practical exercises and a project involving the practical application of the techniques explained in class. 30% 3D Cardio Project 20% Practical assignments (challenges) 10% Participation and submission of exercises completed in class Exercises must be submitted by the relevant deadline. Under no circumstances will work submitted after the deadline be accepted, except in justified cases. TO PASS THE COURSE, STUDENTS MUST ACHIEVE 5 OUT OF 10 POINTS AND OBTAIN AT LEAST 3.5 POINTS IN EACH OF THE AREAS. Students who have not been able to pass the course through CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT may sit the REGULAR and EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSIONS, provided they have complied with the provisions of the Student Assessment Regulations. If a student fails the module through continuous assessment, any student who has achieved a mark of 5 out of 10 or higher in any of the AREAS will be exempt from that AREA for the ordinary or extraordinary examination sessions. In the ordinary and extraordinary examination sessions, students who fail the PRACTICAL AREA must improve their practical assignments and project, taking into account the feedback provided, and resubmit them to be eligible for a pass in that area on the day of the THEORETICAL AREA examination. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0241814 | Further Mathematics | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Further MathematicsCódigo: 0241814 Imprimir Year 2, Course 2. First term. Foundation module. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To provide students with a solid foundation in mathematics that will enable them to apply mathematical tools to the resolution of engineering problems. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Learning Outcomes In addition to contributing to the acquisition of basic and general competences (BC), this module, once completed by the student, contributes to the student’s acquisition of the competences detailed below. General competences CG2 Ability to manage the activities involved in the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling students to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 Ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making and creativity, to engage in critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. Specific competences CE1 The ability to solve mathematical problems that may arise in engineering. Ability to apply knowledge of: linear algebra, geometry, differential geometry, differential and integral calculus, differential and partial differential equations, numerical methods, numerical algorithms, statistics and optimisation. Learning outcomes RA3 Understand and apply the fundamentals of linear algebra to the manipulation of matrices and the solution of systems of equations RA4 Understand and apply techniques for solving differential equations in the context of problems encountered in engineering LA5 Understand and apply the standard numerical methods used to solve problems encountered in engineering RA6 Solve optimisation and simulation problems similar to those encountered in engineering by selecting and applying the appropriate methods RA7 Develop proficiency in calculating and manipulating mathematical expressions RA8 Identify a mathematical problem, apply the necessary techniques to solve it and evaluate the results obtained RA9 Model problems similar to those encountered in engineering using mathematical tools and proceed to solve them RA10 Understand and use mathematical language rigorously. RA11 Is able to reason abstractly, using logical and algorithmic thinking RA12 Be able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering Course content Matrices, Vector spaces, Linear applications, Algebraic structures, ODE, Ordinary differential equations, Partial differential equations, Euclidean affine geometry and differential geometry, Numerical analysis, Optimisation and simulation methods. Teaching activities A1 Classroom presentation of concepts related to the topics comprising each subject and problem-solving exercises enabling students to understand how to tackle them, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s acquisition of the required competences. ASSESSMENT SYSTEMS The assessment methods for this module are: - AS1: Various types of exercises in which the student must answer different questions. - AS2: Reports on case studies presented throughout the course. - AS3: Exams covering the full range of learning activities. These systems contribute to a greater or lesser extent to the assessment of the basic, general, cross-curricular and specific competences assigned to this subject. ASSESSMENT CRITERIA The assessment systems described above are set out in the following assessment criteria: - There are two official examination sessions: the ordinary and the supplementary. +++REGULAR EXAMINATION SESSION+++ The final mark for this sitting is the weighted average of a set of assessment tests detailed below: -- two sets of exercises (SE1), each accounting for 7.5% of the final mark for the ordinary assessment period, to be completed individually or in small groups during the teaching term (for further information, please refer to the timetable). -- a report (SE2) on a case study, accounting for 15% of the final mark for the ordinary assessment period, to be completed individually or in small groups at the end of the teaching term (for further information, please refer to the timetable). -- two mid-term exams (SE3), which will be taken individually during the term (for further information, please refer to the timetable) and will account for 35 per cent of the final mark for the standard assessment period. *** The module is considered passed in the ordinary assessment period if the final mark is 5.0 or higher; otherwise, the student may sit the ordinary assessment exam: this consists of a single exam covering the entire syllabus. +++EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION PERIOD+++ If a student fails to pass the module during the ordinary examination period, they may do so during the extraordinary examination period. The supplementary examination period will take place during the July examination period (for further information, please consult the virtual campus). It consists of a single examination covering the entire syllabus of the module. *** The module is considered passed in the supplementary sitting if the final mark is 5.0 or higher. GRADES Article 5 of Royal Decree 1125/2003 of 5 September establishes the marking system applicable to modules within degree programmes falling within the scope of the European Higher Education Area. This system is as follows: The award of the corresponding credits is conditional upon passing the associated examinations or assessment tests. The level of learning achieved by students will be expressed as numerical marks on a scale of 0 to 10, to one decimal place, to which the corresponding qualitative mark may be added: - 0–4.9: Fail (SS). - 5.0–6.9: Pass (AP). - 7.0–8.9: Good (NT). - 9.0–10: Distinction (SB). The distinction ‘Honours’ shall be awarded to students who have obtained a mark of 9.0 or higher. The number of students awarded this distinction may not exceed five per cent of those enrolled on the course in the relevant academic year, unless the number of enrolled students is fewer than 20, in which case only one ‘First Class Honours’ may be awarded. Bibliography Essential: 1. Burden, Richard L. Numerical Analysis Mexico City: Thomson, 2002. 2002. ISBN: 9706861343 2. Orozco-Guijarro Partial Differential Equations Bellisco. 2011. ISBN: 9788495277169 3. Simmons, George F. Differential Equations: Theory, Technique and Practice Mexico; Madrid: McGraw Hill, 2007. 2007. ISBN: 9701061438 Supplementary: 4.- Haberman, Richard Partial Differential Equations: with Fourier Series and Madrid: Pearson Educación, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8420535346 5. Zill, Dennis G. Differential Equations with Applications to Modelling Mexico City [etc.]: International Thomson, 2007. 2007. ISBN: 9706864873 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 36 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
SECOND FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0241516 | Business Administration | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Business AdministrationCódigo: 0241516 Imprimir Year 2 Course. Second term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives Business Administration is a social, economic and technical discipline. Its main objective is to maximise the profit of an organisation. It achieves this through the organisation, planning, management and control of the resources at its disposal. Prerequisites No prior requirements have been set. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, valuations, appraisals, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. C17 Adequate knowledge of the concept of a business and its institutional and legal framework. Business organisation and management. C28 Applied knowledge of business organisation. SKILLS AND ABILITIES C8 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. COMPETENCIES C9 Ability to organise and plan within the context of a business, and other institutions and organisations. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RFK1 Understands the behaviour of businesses and markets, and the importance of integrating industrial design engineering into industry and the local, national and international economy. RK18 Understands the basics and fundamentals of the structure, institutional, legal and economic framework, and the organisation and management of businesses. COMPETENCIES RFC3 Possesses the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. RC17 Studies the economic and financial viability of a project or business investment based on accounting data and calculates the costs of a product or service. Course description The company as a system Types of companies and legal forms How markets function. The economic environment of the company. Business organisation Business creation and innovation: technology-based companies. Concept and classification of companies. Economic functions of companies. The life cycle of companies. The general environment of the company. The specific environment of the company. The interrelationship between the company and other economic agents. The simple organisational structure. The functional organisational structure. The matrix organisational structure. The divisional organisational structure. Other organisational structures. The continuous production system. The intermittent production system. The modular production system. The project-based production system. The quality control system. The quality assurance system. The total quality system. The nature and objectives of business research. The development of production processes and products. The relationship between innovation and business competitiveness. The innovation system in the European Union. Training activities AP1. – Lectures Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the field, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, providing an in-depth study of a specific subject. They encourage students to engage in reflective and inquisitive participation. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and shared. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP4: -Preparation of assignments or projects and resolution of challenges This is a teacher-led activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired knowledge and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE4. – Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) collected in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course is assessed, with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 30% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 50% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 30% 1st Exam + assignments on topics 1 to 4: 40% of the final mark (80% of this mark is derived from an exam and the remainder from the set topics) 2nd Exam + assignments on topics 4 to 7: 40% of the final mark (80% of this mark is derived from an exam and the remainder from the set topics) 3rd Small-group assignments and PRESENTATIONS – ROLE PLAY (20%). EXAM: Students who fail the course, whether in the main or resit examination period, will be examined on the entire syllabus. The examination will consist of three parts: multiple-choice, theory and practical. The practical cases will be based on the assignments completed during the course. OTHER CONSIDERATIONS: When giving presentations or undertaking role-play activities, students must dress formally, as they would in a real professional setting. Students who do not meet this requirement will not be assessed on that activity. In the case of a particularly creative and innovative presentation, the need for specific attire may be discussed individually with the lecturer. Absence from university outreach activities (seminars, lectures, workshops, etc.) must be duly justified to the lecturer with an official certificate; justification via the academic tutor will not be accepted. Students who fail the ordinary examination session must sit the supplementary examination. The September mark will be the mark obtained in the exam. For continuous assessment to be taken into account, a minimum mark of 3.5 must be achieved in the final exam. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0241517 | Big Data & Analytics Fundamentals / Fundamentals of Data Analysis | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Big Data & Analytics Fundamentals / Fundamentals of Data AnalysisCódigo: 0241517 Imprimir Year 2 Course. Second term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The primary aim of the module is to equip students with the basic theoretical and practical knowledge required for big data analysis. Furthermore, it aims to introduce students to the applications of data analysis within the field of Industrial Design and Product Development Engineering. Prerequisites Basic knowledge of calculus and statistics. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling students to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the flexibility to adapt to new situations. C14 Basic knowledge of the use and programming of computers, operating systems, databases and software with applications in engineering. C5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. SKILLS AND ABILITIES C8 Ability to apply quality principles and methods C12 Ability to solve mathematical problems that may arise in engineering. Ability to apply knowledge of: linear algebra; geometry; differential geometry; differential and integral calculus; differential and partial differential equations; numerical methods; numerical algorithms; statistics and optimisation COMPETENCIES C1 Ability to draft, approve and carry out projects in the field of industrial engineering which are aimed, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. C4 Ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making and creativity, using critical reasoning, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RFK2 Possesses the foundations to begin exploring, organising and analysing data in order to extract knowledge from it and make predictions with the aim of identifying new business areas which, aided by this type of decision-support technology, may lead to innovative products and services that enhance the competitiveness of companies. RK3 Identifies the commands available in programming systems, the input and output parameters, and the correlation between them for application in complex routines. RK20 Is familiar with the most common IT tools for word processing, using spreadsheets with macros, creating presentations, project planning, and the analysis and processing of complex datasets. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RFS3 Applies appropriate methodologies and techniques for design innovation, maintaining a strategic and innovative vision throughout the product design project development process. RS7 Manages information and documentation relating to product development projects in a comprehensive and future-proof manner, expanding available knowledge from an innovation perspective to produce project documentation, propose alternatives, justify proposals and draw conclusions. RS15 Applies theories on the analysis and processing of complex data sets to extract relevant information, organise data to establish strategies, and analyse trends. Course content MS Excel: Basic concepts, templates, visualisation, use of formulas and an introduction to macros Basic concepts of data analysis: mode, quartiles, histograms. Hypothesis testing: Student’s t-test, chi-square test Simple regression and ANOVA Multiple regression Logistic regression Survival analysis Data optimisation Predictive models Training activities AP1. – Lectures Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the subject, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which an in-depth study of a specific subject is carried out. They encourage students to engage in reflective and inquisitive participation. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and shared. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and practical skills and abilities relating to a specific subject area. AP4: - Development of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-guided activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired learning and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE2.- Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge tests. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. Two mid-term exams will be held during the semester, each accounting for 50 per cent of the final course mark. In order to pass the module for the academic year, students must achieve a weighted mark of five out of ten or higher; otherwise, their mark for the academic year will be NP (not presented). If a student fails the course, they must sit the ordinary examination, which will cover the entire syllabus, and the mark obtained in this examination will be the final mark for the course in the ordinary examination session. If a student fails to pass the module during the term and also fails the ordinary examination, they must sit the supplementary examination, which will cover the entire syllabus; the mark obtained in this examination will be the final mark for the module in the supplementary examination. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0241518 | Computer-Aided Design and Manufacturing. CAD CAM | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Computer-Aided Design and Manufacturing. CAD CAMCódigo: 0241518 Imprimir Year 2 Course. Second term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives Proficiency in using tools for generating 3D models and creating designs. Development of a general understanding of the computer systems integrated into the product design and development process. Students will acquire the technical knowledge required for the correct creation, interpretation, basic analysis and optimisation of a design from the perspective of generating models and drawings for development and manufacture, with the aim of meeting the application’s requirements. Prerequisites Knowledge of Technical Drawing and Computer-Aided Design. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. C14 Basic knowledge of the use and programming of computers, operating systems, databases and software applications in engineering. C24 Knowledge of the principles of the theory of machines and mechanisms. C26 Basic knowledge of production and manufacturing systems SKILLS AND ABILITIES C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. C8 Ability to apply the principles and methods of quality management COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 COMPETENCIES C4 Ability to solve problems using initiative, decision-making and creativity, as well as critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. C16 Ability to visualise in three dimensions and knowledge of graphic representation techniques, both through traditional methods of metric and descriptive geometry and through computer-aided design applications. C30 Knowledge and skills to apply engineering graphics techniques. C37 Applied knowledge of manufacturing systems and processes, metrology and quality control. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK4 Understands graphic representation techniques using traditional methods of metric geometry and descriptive geometry, as well as computer-aided design applications, to correctly produce, read, interpret and implement industrial technical drawings in a standardised, clear and precise manner, based on graphic representation systems as tools for spatial thinking. RK16 Possesses the knowledge required to use computer software, enabling them to work with existing computer-aided design (CAD), computer-aided manufacturing (CAM) and computer-aided engineering (CAE) tools, and to integrate these into industrial design and product development. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RFS5 Has a command of various 2D and 3D design and drafting tools and programmes, including CAD, CAM and CAE, which help students to integrate this language, equipping them with the digital skills essential for their future careers, enabling them to communicate and test their designs. RS2 Uses graphic representation systems, as well as the conventions and standards commonly used in engineering, to draw manufacturing drawings on the appropriate medium—using both traditional methods of metric geometry and descriptive geometry, as well as computer-aided design applications—thereby compiling the technical information required for subsequent manufacturing. RS7 Manages information and documentation relating to product development projects in a comprehensive and future-proof manner, expanding available knowledge from an innovation perspective to produce project documentation, proposing alternatives, justifying the proposal and drawing conclusions. COMPETENCIES RC12 Is proficient in CAD/CAM software for the graphical representation of designs, as well as the formal presentation of the analysis and graphical representation of the project. RODS Develops effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to conduct oneself with integrity in the professional sphere. Course content Introduction to CATIA or similar software Sketcher, Part Design Assembly Motion studies Manufacturing process analysis Computer-aided simulation Training activities AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and practical skills and abilities relating to a specific subject area. AP4: -Completion of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-guided activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired knowledge and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, according to their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. SE4. Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) is assessed; this evidence is compiled in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 60% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 60% AS3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 0% MAXIMUM 30% AS4 Portfolio MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 30% - Assessment will be continuous and will include mechanisms for students to make up for any knowledge and skills not acquired during the course period. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0241519 | Manufacturing Engineering | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Manufacturing EngineeringCódigo: 0241519 Imprimir Year 2, Course 2. Second term. Foundation module. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To understand the characteristics of the main manufacturing processes, ranging from the processing of raw materials to the study of continuous processes in large-scale industry, including specific processes for small production runs or design objects. The course will cover machining, forming and casting processes. Fundamentals of computer-aided manufacturing and numerically controlled machines. Dimensional control of manufactured parts. Knowledge of metal part manufacturing processes should be geared towards the design of parts that can be manufactured at an acceptable cost (facilitating their manufacture). Prerequisites Knowledge of technical drawing Fundamentals of Physics Fundamentals of materials. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling students to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the flexibility to adapt to new situations. C26 Basic knowledge of production and manufacturing systems SKILLS AND ABILITIES C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. C8 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. COMPETENCIES C37 Applied knowledge of manufacturing systems and processes, metrology and quality control. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK7 Understands manufacturing systems and processes, metrology and quality control in order to determine the most suitable manufacturing process for any type of component, based on technical and economic criteria. Optimises the parameters of the manufacturing process with the aim of achieving efficient production. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RFS2 Selects existing or emerging industrial technologies, transformation processes and materials that add value to the proposed products, taking into account optimisation, sustainable production and economic viability. COMPETENCIES RC5 Determines the most suitable manufacturing process for any type of part, based on technical and economic criteria. Optimises the parameters of the manufacturing process to ensure efficient production. Description of the content Manufacturing systems and processes Conventional machining processes Casting Forming. Fundamentals of computer-aided manufacturing. Numerical control machines. Economics, design and optimisation of machining. Quality Control Topic 1. Manufacturing processes. Topic 2. Dimensional control. Topic 3. Machining. Topic 4. Casting. Topic 5. Deformation. Practical sessions on casting, dimensional control and CNC machining Training activities AP1. Lecture sessions Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the subject, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which an in-depth study of a specific subject is carried out. They encourage reflective and inquisitive participation from students. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and practical skills and abilities relating to a specific subject area. AP4: - Development of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-guided activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired learning and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the regular examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows assignments and/or exercises to be submitted via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the attainment of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to record information about their research but also about their learning process. SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 40% MAXIMUM 50% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 40% MAXIMUM 50% SE3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 30% Continuous assessment mark per course: Test 1 10% of the final mark Test 2 (Official January exam) 15% of the final mark Test 3 10% of the final mark Test 4 (Official May–June exam) 15% of the final mark Assignment and presentation: 20% of the final mark Practical work and exercises: 20% of the final mark * There is no minimum mark for any component * No components are carried over to the resit sitting |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0241520 | Design Engineering Laboratory 1 | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Design Engineering Laboratory 1Código: 0241520 Imprimir Year 2, Course 2. Second term. Foundation module. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives This module aims to establish a theoretical and practical foundation for the completion of an industrial design project. The course will begin by developing a basic design exercise, and students will progress by undertaking increasingly complex design exercises. Prerequisites Students must have completed the following modules: • Graphic Expression. • Artistic Expression. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK1 Understands graphic and visual language and the tools of expression and representation in order to communicate and develop designs. The tools mentioned will offer a broad scope for the fluid communication of concepts and designs. These tools encompass all the classic tools of artistic drawing, technical drawing and standardisation, preliminary models, scale models, as well as computer-aided graphic and industrial design. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RS1 Takes a holistic view of the various dimensions that come together in products: aesthetic, semiotic, functional, typological and technological, in order to make ideas tangible and bring product design concepts to life. RS2 Applies their knowledge to product design solutions by using drawing tools and specialised software to determine the most appropriate way to communicate their work to third parties, whether or not they are experts in the field, using conceptual or visual skills to communicate ideas and concepts in a clear and effective manner, whilst selecting the most appropriate media and content. COMPETENCIES RC1 Possesses the ability to create new products and services, drawing on engineering knowledge of the materials that make up the technological environment as a source of value, and the relationship between emotion and product to create the optimal experience in the product-human-society interaction and to respond to society’s demand for products, concepts and services; this involves the ability to analyse, synthesise and make appropriate decisions in order to identify and resolve problems or practical cases based on given specifications. RC2 Designs innovative new products, systems, services and experiences through their various phases to ensure that objectives are met, integrating aspects relating to the emotional, social and cultural spheres into their specifications, in line with business strategy. RODS Develops effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, drawing clearly on democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to conduct oneself with integrity in the professional sphere. Description of the content Solving basic problems through experimentation and creativity. Gaining knowledge through trial and error to improve the proposed solution. Planning the design process. Design and planning of three-dimensional models. Construction techniques. Functional, aesthetic and ingenious evaluation. Training activities AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and manipulative skills and abilities relating to a specific subject area. AP5 – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the module and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, according to their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows assignments and/or exercises to be submitted via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the attainment of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: 15% corresponds to the first project assignment. 25% corresponds to the second project assignment. 25% corresponds to the third project assignment. 35% corresponds to the fourth project assignment. For these percentages to apply, all project assignments must be submitted. The mark for the project assignments will be based on the marks for the various project submissions, together with the marks for any presentations and oral defences that take place. Furthermore, when assessing the project stages, the student’s attendance and participation in class will be taken into account when marking the stages, accounting for 5 per cent of the final mark for the stage. Assignments must be submitted by the relevant deadline. Under no circumstances will work be accepted after the deadline, except in justified cases. TO PASS THE COURSE, A MARK OF 5/10 IS REQUIRED. REGULAR EXAM SESSION: Students who have not been able to pass through continuous assessment may sit the FINAL EXAMINATION in the ordinary examination period, provided they have complied with the provisions of the Student Assessment Regulations. A practical examination will be held, for which students will be set a project-based exercise similar in nature to those set during the course, to be completed within the three-hour duration of the examination. For this reason, students must bring to the examination any materials they deem necessary to complete such an exercise. EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSION: All students, without exception, who have not passed the module through continuous assessment or in the ordinary examination session, may sit the FINAL EXAMINATION in the extraordinary examination session, following the same procedure as for the ordinary examination session. NOTE: In both examinations, a HIGH standard of execution and graphical content , as it is possible to pass the course. ASSESSMENT CRITERIA: The following assessment criteria apply to the project-based exercises: Four project-based exercises will be set throughout the course, with a increasing levels of difficulty. The criteria governing the assessment of the knowledge acquired by students through the completion of the project-based exercises set during the course will be as follows: Analytical and critical thinking skills Appropriateness of the proposal to the problem posed Proactive approach Ability to develop proposals to the required standard Proficiency in the use of tools Appropriateness of the visual presentation To this end, the following aspects will be assessed in each design exercise: Adherence to the design methodology taught in class Aesthetic innovation Functional innovation The originality of the idea The structural risk of the object Applied ergonomics. The introduction of new functions. Adaptation to use. Ability to communicate visually. Presentation of the final project. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0241822 | Thermodynamics and Heat Transfer | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Thermodynamics and Heat TransferCódigo: 0241822 Imprimir Year 2 Course. Second term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives Students will be provided with a basic understanding of the variables, processes and principles governing thermodynamic processes. Furthermore, the various mechanisms of heat transfer will be analysed and, from a practical perspective, problems commonly encountered in engineering will be studied. Prerequisites Basic knowledge of physics and mathematics. Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 The ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG7 The ability to analyse and assess the social and environmental impact of technical solutions. CG8 Ability to organise and plan within the context of a company, and other institutions and organisations. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the relevant legislation in the practice of the profession of Industrial Technical Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE9 Knowledge of applied thermodynamics and heat transfer. Basic principles and their application to solving engineering problems. Learning outcomes RA1 Understanding the states of matter of pure substances and using models to calculate their thermodynamic properties. LR2 Analyse the mass, energy and entropy balances of thermodynamic processes and cycles in open and closed systems LO3 Understand the modes of heat transfer and the key concepts and aspects of heat exchangers LO4 Identify, formulate and solve heat transfer problems using established methods. LA5 Be able to pose and solve problems with initiative and creativity, applying critical thinking. Course content 1. THERMODYNAMICS: - Topic 1. Introduction and basic concepts. - Topic 2. Energy transfer via heat, work and mass. - Topic 3. The First Law of Thermodynamics. - Topic 4. Properties of pure substances. Tables of properties. - Topic 5. The Second Law of Thermodynamics. Entropy - Topic 6. Open systems 2. HEAT TRANSFER: - Topic 7. Introduction - Topic 8. Material properties in heat transfer - Topic 9. Heat transfer by conduction. Conduction through multiple layers. - Topic 10. Total heat transfer coefficient - Topic 11. Fins and their use. - Topic 12. Graphical methods: Heisler diagrams. - Topic 13. Convection processes. - Topic 14. Heat transfer by radiation - Topic 15. Heat exchangers. Learning activities A1 Classroom presentation of concepts relating to the topics comprising each subject and problem-solving exercises to enable students to understand how to tackle them, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be divided into two types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s independent study. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). During the semester, there will be four tests: two covering the Thermodynamics section (T1 and T2) and two covering the Heat Transfer section (TC1 and TC2). The average mark from these tests will be the final mark for each section: - Thermodynamics mark = (T1 + T2)/2 - Heat Transfer mark = (TC1 + TC2)/2 Students must achieve a mark of 3.5 or higher in all exams (T1, T2, TC1, TC2) in order for their marks to be averaged: To pass the module via continuous assessment (Final Continuous Assessment Mark, EVC), the average mark for both parts must be 5 or above, and no mark in either part may be below 3.5. - Final CCA mark = (Thermodynamics mark + Heat Transfer mark)/2 - Thermodynamics mark ≥ 3.5 - Heat Transfer mark ≥ 3.5 REGULAR EXAM SESSION (June) and SUPPLEMENTARY EXAM SESSION (July): If a student passes only one part of the module, the mark for that part obtained through continuous assessment will be retained, meaning the student will sit an exam only for the part they have failed, and must achieve a minimum mark of 3.5 in order to have this averaged with the mark for the part they have already passed. Students sitting the entire module will take two examinations, one for each part, and must achieve a minimum mark of 3.5 in each part and an average mark of 5 or above to pass the module. Clarifications: - Students who have passed one part but wish to sit the full examination will forfeit the mark they have already obtained. - If a part is passed in the Ordinary Examination Session, this result will be carried over to the Extraordinary Examination Session. Bibliography Core: 1. Cengel Thermodynamics McGraw-Hill. 2009. ISBN: 9789701072868 2. Cengel, Yunus A. Heat Transfer Mexico City: McGraw-Hill Interamericana, 2004. 2004. ISBN: 9701044843 3. Chapman, A. J. Heat Transfer 3rd ed. Madrid: Bellisco, 1990. 1990. ISBN: 8485198425 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 36 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Third Year
FIRST FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0241817 | Mechanics | FB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
MechanicsCódigo: 0241817 Imprimir Course 3. First-term module. Foundation course. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To become familiar with, understand and master the following basic concepts of Mechanics: particle mechanics (kinematics and dynamics), classical and analytical statics, the kinematics and dynamics of rigid bodies, and the theory of flexible strings. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies Basic and general competences CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling students to learn new methods and theories, and equipping them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. Specific competences CE2 Understanding and mastery of the basic concepts relating to the general laws of mechanics, thermodynamics, fields and waves, and electromagnetism, and their application to solving engineering problems. Learning outcomes LR1 Modelling, analysing and calculating the static equilibrium of solids. LR2 To analyse, describe and calculate the plane motion of particles and solids. LR3 Understand and apply the fundamentals of fluid statics and dynamics. LO4 Identify, analyse and calculate oscillatory and wave phenomena. LA5 Understand and apply the fundamentals of thermodynamics. RA6 Understand the basic principles and laws governing heat transfer. RA7 Understand the general laws governing the behaviour of electric and magnetic fields and apply them to problem-solving. RA8 Understand, use and handle physical quantities appropriately and with rigour. RA9 Is able to carry out experimental tests in the physics laboratory, as well as to analyse, evaluate and interpret the results obtained. RA10 Be able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. Course content 1. Particle Kinematics and Dynamics 2. Oscillations 3. Kinematics and Dynamics of Rigid Bodies 4. Lagrangian Mechanics 5. Statics 6. String Theory Teaching activities A1 Classroom-based presentation of concepts relating to the topics covered in each subject and problem-solving exercises designed to help students understand how to tackle these topics, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A2 Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems independently. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Assessment tests may include multiple-choice questions, short-answer questions, essay questions, problem-solving tasks, case studies, laboratory tests or workshops, or the design of prototypes, products or models, to be completed in writing or orally. Where applicable, the course coordinator will provide details of the assessment format to be used prior to the assessments taking place. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be categorised into three types: - E1: Written assessments throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s independent study. - E2: Reports on laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: - Mid-term exams: Two written tests (37% each). A mark of 4 or above must be obtained in both mid-term exams to be eligible for continuous assessment. - Problem-solving (6%) - Laboratory practical reports (20%). Students must pass the laboratory module to be eligible for continuous assessment. REGULAR EXAM SESSION: - Exam covering all course content (80%) - Mark obtained in the laboratory practicals (20%) SESSION FOR STUDENTS WHO MISSED THE REGULAR EXAM: - Exam covering all course content (100%) Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Bibliography Core: 1. Álvaro Hacar, Favio Revuelta, Israel Saeta, Pablo M. García and Enrique Maciá Lagrangian Mechanics: Theory and Practice Free book from Alqua. 2009. ISBN: 0000000000000 2. John R. Taylor Classical Mechanics Reverte. 2018. ISBN: 9788429194593 3. Rafael Magro, Marta Serrano and Laura Abad RATIONAL MECHANICS: 90 Useful Problems García - Maroto Editores. 2006. ISBN: 84-934785-6-3 Supplementary: 4. Artemio González López Handbook of Classical Mechanics Artemio González López. 2022. ISBN: 8469526510 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0341512 | Graphic Design and Communication | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Graphic Design and CommunicationCódigo: 0341512 Imprimir Course 3. First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The Graphic Design and Communication module focuses on the study, process, methodology, creation, organisation, production and evaluation of the visual elements that serve as a vehicle for communication within a professional and socio-cultural context, imparting aesthetic and functional value to messages, formats and media. In light of this, the course aims to prepare professionals capable of applying the knowledge they have acquired, as well as developing problem-solving skills in new environments within multidisciplinary contexts related to their field of study, thereby contributing to the enrichment of the visual realm and cultural identity. The Graphic Design module enables students to develop technical skills by applying design methodology, and to learn to express themselves using various tools to visually communicate social, cultural, aesthetic and technological information. In this way, it enables the communication of conclusions – and the knowledge and underlying rationale that support them – to both specialist and non-specialist audiences. This discipline requires qualities such as the ability to synthesise, critical thinking, decision-making, observation and the ability to form judgements on design problems, as well as mastery of the tools of expression and representation in order to communicate designs, ideas and values that are useful to society. Similarly, students develop the ability to decide on the use of the necessary technological tools and resources at the various stages of generating and presenting design projects, as well as during their production and implementation. Prerequisites Knowledge of: Colour and Form Analysis, Creativity, Basic Design and Design Methodology Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK1 Understands the graphic and visual language and the tools of expression and representation in order to communicate and test designs. The tools mentioned will offer a broad scope for the fluid communication of concepts and designs. These tools encompass all the classic tools of artistic drawing, technical drawing and standardisation, preliminary models, scale models, as well as computer-aided graphic and industrial design. RK2 Understand the Fundamentals and Supporting Techniques of Design: Ergonomics, Anthropometry and Biomechanics; Fundamental Elements of Graphic Design; History of Design, enabling students to make and justify decisions, communicate effectively and draw conclusions in the field of industrial design engineering in order to achieve optimal designs. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RS2 Applies their knowledge to product design solutions by using drawing tools and specialised software to determine the most appropriate way to convey their work to third parties, whether or not they are experts in the field, making use of conceptual or visual skills that communicate ideas and concepts in a flexible and effective manner, choosing the most appropriate media and content. RODS Develops effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to conduct oneself with integrity in the professional sphere. Course Content Description Fundamentals of Graphic Design Branding Applications of Graphic Design Product and Project Communication Packaging: Packaging Design Technological Tools and Resources in Graphic Design and Communication Training Activities AP1 – Lecture sessions Lecture-based sessions in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the field, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and hands-on skills and abilities relating to a specific topic. AP4: - Development of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-guided activity in which students must complete an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-world complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired knowledge and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, according to their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows assignments and/or exercises to be submitted via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE4. – Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) collected in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course is assessed, with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 0% MAXIMUM 30% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 40% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 90% • Assessment will be continuous and will include mechanisms for students to make up for any knowledge and skills not acquired during the period in which the module is taught. MODULES 30% Text Design: InDesign 30% Graphic Design: Illustrator 30% Image Design: Photoshop REGULAR EXAM SESSION: WEIGHTING 15% Exercises completed in class + Skill School 15% 1st Project 15% 2nd Project 15% 3rd Project 20% Mid-term exam – Theory 20% Mid-term exam – Practical In order to calculate the average across the different components and pass via continuous assessment, students must achieve at least a 4 in each of the modules and have submitted 100% of the class exercises. If the mark obtained through this process is 5 or above, the student will have passed the module in the ordinary assessment period. REGULAR EXAMINATION PERIOD: In the ordinary examination session, the marks for the modules in which the student has achieved a mark of 5 or above during the academic year will be retained, and the student will have to sit an examination on the subject(s) in the modules for which they have achieved a mark below 5. To calculate the mark for the ordinary examination period, each module will be weighted as follows: 30% InDesign 30% Illustrator 30% Photoshop 10% Attendance and class participation (the mark obtained throughout the academic year will be retained). EXTRAORDINARY EXAM SESSION: In the resit, the marks for the modules in which the student has achieved a mark of 5 or above during the course will be retained, and the student will be required to sit an examination in the subject(s) within the modules for which they received a mark below 5. To calculate the mark for the resit, each module will be weighted as follows: 30% InDesign 30% Illustrator 30% Photoshop 10% Exercises applying concepts explained in class (100% of the exercises must be submitted) 100% TOTAL |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0341513 | Elasticity and Strength of Materials | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Elasticity and Strength of MaterialsCódigo: 0341513 Imprimir Course 3. First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this module is to study the behaviour of deformable solids and to establish the criteria that enable us to determine the most suitable material, shape and dimensions for these solids when they are used as components of a machine or structure, so that they can withstand external forces. Prerequisites Knowledge of the following subjects: Physics, Mathematics, Materials and Technical Drawing. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. C25 Knowledge and application of the principles of strength of materials. C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. COMPETENCIES C1 Ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of industrial engineering which are intended, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. C4 Ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making and creativity, to use critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK10 Possesses applied knowledge of the principles of strength of materials. SKILLS AND COMPETENCIES RFS2 Selects existing or emerging industrial technologies, manufacturing processes and materials that add value to the proposed products, taking into account optimisation, sustainable production and economic viability. RS5 Identifies the technical principles associated with processes arising from the application of loads to solid bodies: tension, bending and torsion, and their consequences on materials for the design and modelling of mechanical components. COMPETENCIES RFC3 Possesses the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. Course content Equilibrium and stress Elastic solids Tension Uniform torsion Instability and buckling Mechanics of materials General study of the behaviour of engineering solids: Concepts of stress and strain. Plane elasticity. Analysis of structural members subjected to stresses: axial, shear, bending and torsional. Deformations of beams. Failure theories and equivalent stresses. Experimental methods for analysing stresses and deformations: photoelasticity. Analysis of the elastic behaviour of materials 1. Equations of elastic equilibrium and the concept of stress. 1.1. Elastic behaviour of solids. 1.2. The concept of stress. Normal and shear stress. 1.3. Relationship between forces and stresses. Physical significance. 2. Stress state in elastic solids. 2.1. Matrix representation of the elastic problem. Stress tensor. 2.2. Equations of internal equilibrium. 2.3. Stresses and principal directions. 2.4. Stress ellipsoid. 2.5. Octahedral stresses. 2.6. Mohr’s circle 3. Analysis of deformations in a continuous medium. 3.1. Concepts of displacement and deformation. Longitudinal and transverse deformation. 3.2. Matrix representation of the elastic problem in terms of strains. Strain tensor. 3.3. Strains and principal directions. 3.4. Rotation matrix and strain matrix. 3.5. Spherical matrix and deviator matrix. 4. Relationships between stresses and strains. 4.1. Generalised Hooke’s law. 4.2. Lamé’s equations. 4.3. Compatibility between stresses and strains. 5. General formulation of the elastic problem. 6. Two-dimensional elasticity. 6.1. Plane stress. 6.2. Plane strain. 6.3. Graphical methods for calculating stresses and strains. Mohr’s circle. 6.4. Singular lines. Mechanics of materials 7. Fundamental assumptions regarding the strength of materials. 7.1. Theorem of static equilibrium. 7.2. Theorem of elastic equilibrium. 8. Determination of internal forces. Equilibrium of an elastic solid. 8.1. Prismatic beams. 8.2. Axial stress. Tension and compression. 8.3. Shear stress. 8.4. Bending moment. Bending 8.5. Torsional stress. 9. Stresses and strains. Section analysis. 9.1. Normal stresses. Navier–Bernoulli’s hypothesis. 9.2. Tangential stresses. Colignon’s theorem. 10. Deformations and movements. Teaching activities AP1. – Lectures Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the subject, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, providing an in-depth study of a specific subject. They encourage students to engage in reflective and inquisitive participation. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and practical skills and abilities relating to a specific topic. AP4: - Development of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-guided activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired learning and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the module and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, according to their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the regular examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. SE4. Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) is assessed; this evidence is compiled in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place Assessment systems MAXIMUM SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 50% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 40% MAXIMUM 60% SE3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 40% Assessment Criteria: The syllabus covered in each test will be based on the material explained up to that point. The dates of these tests are specified in the relevant timetable. 1) Continuous Assessment: - Test 1: 40%. - Test 2: 45 per cent. - Laboratory practical tests: 15 per cent. Therefore, to pass the module through continuous assessment, students must obtain 5 marks or more according to the formula: (C1 × 0.40) + (C2 × 0.45) + (Lb × 0.15). Furthermore, they must achieve a minimum mark of 3 out of a possible 10 in each component. As an essential requirement, students must have submitted their laboratory practical workbook, duly completed, and must have attended all the practical sessions. The laboratory mark will be awarded following a test worth 10 marks, to be held on the agreed date once all practical sessions have been completed. If a student does not sit the continuous assessment and has passed one of the sections (elasticity or strength), this mark will be retained for subsequent examination sessions, but never carried over from one academic year to the next. 2) Ordinary Examination Session: Students who do not pass the module through continuous assessment will sit a final examination for the module, which will account for 100% of the final mark. (0.5 × Elasticity) + (0.5 × Plasticity), provided the minimum marks are met. 3) Supplementary Examination Period: Students who do not pass the module in the Ordinary Examination Period will sit a final examination for the module, which will account for 100 per cent of the final mark. (0.5 × Elasticity) + (0.5 × Plasticity), provided the minimum marks are met. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0341514 | Design Engineering Laboratory 2 | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Design Engineering Laboratory 2Código: 0341514 Imprimir Course 3. First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The objectives of the module essentially consist of describing the methods and aims of generating and testing models and prototypes in the design process, as well as enabling students to learn and practise the common manufacturing and testing techniques associated with models and prototypes. Prerequisites Students must have completed the following modules: • Graphic Expression. • Artistic Expression. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. C26 Basic knowledge of production and manufacturing systems COMPETENCIES C1 Ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of industrial engineering aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. C4 Ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making and creativity, to use critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. C37 Applied knowledge of manufacturing systems and processes, metrology and quality control. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK5 Understands graphic and visual language and the tools of expression and representation in order to communicate and test designs. The tools mentioned will have a broad scope to enable the fluid communication of concepts and designs. These tools encompass all the classic tools of artistic drawing, technical drawing and standardisation, pre-models and models, as well as computer-aided graphic and industrial design. SKILLS AND COMPETENCIES RS1 Solves problems by demonstrating initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and by communicating and conveying knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. RS3 Takes a holistic view of the various dimensions that come together in products: aesthetic, semiotic, functional, typological and technological, in order to make ideas tangible and bring product design concepts to life. RS8 Makes appropriate use of visual language and representation techniques in product design solutions COMPETENCIES RFC1 Designs innovative new products, systems, services and experiences through their various phases to ensure the fulfilment of objectives, integrating aspects relating to the emotional, social and cultural spheres into their specifications, in line with business strategy. RFC2 Possesses the capacity for original creation to respond to society’s demand for products, concepts and services, which entails the ability to analyse, synthesise and make appropriate decisions in order to identify and resolve problems or practical cases based on given specifications. RFC3 Possesses the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. RFC4 Co-ordinates projects in the field of industrial design engineering and product development, drawing on their knowledge of the concept, structure and various phases of an industrial design engineering and product development project, as well as the knowledge required for its economic evaluation, the planning and control of activities and the necessary technical, financial and human resources. RC4 Designs new products by developing guiding concepts through sketches, drawings, volumetric studies, models and prototypes to verify whether the product meets the specified requirements. Description of the content Solving problems of medium complexity, based on prototyping as part of the design project process Design and planning of three-dimensional models. Traditional techniques Design and planning of three-dimensional models. Digital techniques Ideation: Rapid, low-fidelity models Development: Formal models Evaluation: Functional models 1. Introduction. Solving problems of medium complexity, using prototyping as part of the design project process. 2. Design and planning of three-dimensional models. Traditional techniques. A1. – Clay and polymer-based clay. A2. Rigid foams: Polystyrene. A3. Plastic sheets. A4. Moulds. A5. Resins. A6. Surface finishing. Training activities AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and manual skills and abilities relating to a specific subject area. AP5.- Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, supplementing their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. – Tutoring Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the module and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the regular examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE4. – Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) collected in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course is assessed, with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 0% MAXIMUM 30% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 40% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 90% CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT 100% corresponds to assignments applying the techniques described in class; the relative weighting of the exercises is set out in the course schedule. Passing the course is conditional upon completing all practical work for the module with a minimum mark of 3 out of 10. Assignments must be submitted by the relevant deadline. In the marking of assignments assessed through continuous assessment, the student’s attendance and participation in class will be taken into account when grading the assignments, accounting for 20 per cent of the final mark for the assignment. Regular Assessment Period: In May–June, a FINAL ORAL/PRACTICAL EXAM will be held for all students who have not passed via continuous assessment. Supplementary sitting: An ORAL/PRACTICAL FINAL EXAM will be held during the supplementary examination period. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0341515 | Organisation of Production | OB | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Organisation of ProductionCódigo: 0341515 Imprimir Course 3. First-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives One of the main areas of work for industrial engineers is logistics. Today, it is one of the three key areas for the competitiveness of Spanish companies. Students must understand the components of an MPCS (manufacturing planning and control system), where an MPCS fits within the logistics chain, and, in greater detail, production planning and control systems such as MRP, MRP II and JIT. Finally, to complete the supply chain cycle, students must be able to assess performance using key performance indicators (KPIs). Prerequisites Basic knowledge of mathematics. Calculus Competencies In addition to the Guaranteed Minimum Basic Competencies, the module will contribute to the development of the following General Competencies: CG1: The ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2: The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3: Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4: The ability to solve problems with initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5: Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6: The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG7: Ability to analyse and assess the social and environmental impact of technical solutions. CG8: Organisational and planning skills within the context of a company, and other institutions and organisations. CG9: Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment CG10: Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the relevant legislation in the practice of the profession of Industrial Technical Engineer. CG11: Ability to apply quality principles and methods. More specifically, the module aims to ensure that students acquire the following competence common to the Industrial Branch: CCRI9: Basic knowledge of production and manufacturing systems. CCRI11: Applied knowledge of business organisation. Learning outcomes Uses the most advanced techniques to organise the production process. Uses the most advanced techniques to achieve zero defects in production facilities. Understands the techniques and tools for implementing continuous improvement in industrial facilities. Understands existing manufacturing systems and their scope of application. Applies knowledge of the company’s structures and resources to their organisation. Course description 1. Introduction to the module, students and lecturer 2. Introduction to logistics 3. Production planning: Stock management 4. Production planning: MRP, MRPII, CRP 5. Production planning: JIT 6. KPIs Learning Activities A1 Classroom-based presentation of concepts relating to the topics covered in each module and problem-solving exercises designed to enable students to understand how to tackle these topics, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A2 Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems independently. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be categorised into three types: - Type A: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s independent study. - Type B: Reports on laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. - Type C: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Two mid-term exams will be held, each accounting for 40 per cent of the final mark. In addition, class participation, board work and practical assignments submitted in Excel will account for 20 per cent. If the weighted average of the marks obtained in the assessments described above is more than five out of ten, the student passes the module. Otherwise, they must sit the final exam in the ordinary examination period, in which the mark obtained will account for 100 per cent of the final mark. If the student does not pass the module in the ordinary examination session, they may sit the final exam in the supplementary examination session, in which the mark obtained will account for 100 per cent of the final mark. Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0341516 | Manufacturing Processes | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Manufacturing ProcessesCódigo: 0341516 Imprimir Course 3. First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To understand the characteristics of the main manufacturing processes, ranging from the production of raw materials to the study of continuous processes in large-scale industry, including specific processes for small-batch production or design objects. The course will cover processes involving the following materials: polymers, ceramics and glass, wood, polymer matrix composites and joining processes. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Knowledge of manufacturing engineering. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT CM25 Knowledge and application of the principles of strength of materials. CM31 Knowledge and skills for the calculation, design and testing of machines. Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK7 Understands the manufacturing systems and processes, metrology and quality control required to determine the most suitable manufacturing process for any type of component, based on technical and economic criteria. Optimises the parameters of the manufacturing process with a view to achieving efficient production. SKILLS RC5 Determines the most suitable manufacturing process for any type of part, based on technical and economic criteria. Optimises the parameters of the manufacturing process to ensure efficient production. Description of the content Polymer material processing methods Processes for the transformation of composite materials Processes for the transformation of glass and ceramic materials Processes for the transformation of powdered materials Wood processing. Documentation and manufacturing costs Joining processes (welding and adhesives) 0 Introduction (Documentation and manufacturing costs) 1 Polymer processes 2 Composite materials and timber processes 3 Glass processes 4 Powder-based processes 5 Joining processes (welding and adhesives) Training activities AP1. Lecture sessions Lecture-based sessions in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the field, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which an in-depth study of a specific subject is carried out. These encourage reflective and inquisitive participation from students. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and practical skills and abilities relating to a specific subject area. AP4: - Development of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-guided activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired learning and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the module and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria * “The format of assessment tests may include multiple-choice questions, short-answer questions, essay questions, problem-solving tasks, case studies, laboratory tests or workshops, or the design of prototypes, products or models, to be completed in writing or orally. Where applicable, the course coordinator will provide details of the assessment format to be used prior to the assessments taking place.” Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University shall be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessment Objective knowledge assessment. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3. – Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. TFA. Course final project, normally part of a Ulab and always compulsory in order to be eligible for continuous assessment. Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 50% SE2 Final knowledge test MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 60% SE3 Laboratory notebooks TFA Compulsory Course Final Assignment: MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 20% (TFA + UAXSKILLSHOOL) The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s acquisition of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed learning outcomes has been mastered: • Learning activities involving the demonstration of technical skills and independent study will be assessed through written tests throughout the course. • Reports on the progress of laboratory practicals will be assessed to verify the acquisition of the relevant skills. • Technical proficiency in problem-solving and case studies will be assessed through the presentation and defence of practical case studies. This will be assessed against a specific competence profile that takes into account the documentation submitted, the work carried out, and the skills and attitudes demonstrated by the student and the working group. • Assessment will be continuous and will include mechanisms for students to make up for any knowledge and skills not acquired during the course period. In order to indicate the relative weighting of the assessment activities described (see attached table), these can be categorised into three types: Type A: Written tests throughout the course, to assess the technical competences associated with the subject acquired through the student’s individual study. Type B: Reports on laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. Type C: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Type A: Written assessments throughout the semester to assess the technical skills associated with the subjects, acquired through the student’s independent study. These may be replaced by a final assessment prior to the main examination. Type B: Reports on laboratory practicals to assess the acquisition of the skills developed. Type C: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Continuous assessment mark per year: Fewer than 10 students: Assessment 1 (and presentations) 10% of the final mark Test 2 (and presentations) 10% of the final mark Assignment and presentation 50% of the final mark Exercises for Test 3 A and B (exercises and presentations) 10% of the final mark Practical sessions 20% of the final mark 10 students or more: Single assessment in the final class of the course 30% of the final mark End-of-course assignment and defence: 10% of the final mark Exercises, assignments, seminars, presentations, weighted average of these: 30% of the final mark Practical sessions: 30% of the final mark * There is no minimum mark for any of the components * No individual components are recognised for the ordinary or supplementary examination sessions Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0341517 | Computer-Aided Design. CAD | OB | 3 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Computer-Aided Design. CADCódigo: 0341517 Imprimir Course 3. First-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives The course aims to train students in the main techniques of Computer-Aided Design (CAD). Students will learn the general principles common to all CAD applications available on the market, with a focus on a few of the most representative ones, which will form the basis of the practical part of the course and which students will learn to use. The module introduces students to the generation of computer-generated imagery in the following fields: Materials Lighting Rendering Prerequisites Students must have completed the modules corresponding to the subject ‘Graphic Expression’. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK1 Understands graphic and visual language and the tools of expression and representation in order to communicate and test designs. The tools mentioned will cover a broad range to enable the fluid communication of concepts and designs. These tools encompass all the classic tools of artistic drawing, technical drawing and standardisation, preliminary models, scale models, as well as computer-aided graphic and industrial design. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RS2 Applies their knowledge to product design solutions by using drawing tools and specialised software to determine the most appropriate way to convey their work to third parties, whether or not they are experts in the field, making use of conceptual or visual skills that communicate ideas and concepts in a clear and effective manner, whilst selecting the most appropriate media and content. COMPETENCIES RC4 Is proficient in computer-aided simulation, Computer-Aided Design (CAD), Computer-Aided Manufacturing (CAM) and Computer-Aided Engineering (CAE) that enable them to visualise products, analyse the behaviour of parts, sub-assemblies or mechanical systems in order to compare results and draw conclusions, automatically manufacture prototypes to communicate, produce and test their designs, and programme simulation tools for manufacturing processes to optimise them. RODS Develops effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, to operate with integrity in the professional sphere. Course content description Creation and application of digital materials Lighting and cameras Rendering and animations MATERIALS 1 Materials module 2 Standard materials 3 Map assignment 4 Map Types 5 Multi-sub-object material and polygon IDs LIGHTING 1 Types of lighting 1.1 General Lighting 1.2 Omnidirectional Light 1.3 Directional Light CAMERAS 1 Types of cameras 1.1 Camera parameters 1.2 Camera placement 1 3 Camera configuration 1 4 Camera transformation 1 5 Camera alignment 1 6 Camera translation RENDERING Training activities AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and practical skills and abilities relating to a specific topic. AP5 – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the regular examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. SE4. Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) is assessed; this evidence is compiled in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 60% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 60% SE3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 0% MAXIMUM 30% AS4 Portfolio MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 30% CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: 25% corresponds to the submission of exercises relating to specific topics. 25% is based on the submission of a final project. 25% is based on the first mid-term exam (problem-solving). 25% is based on the second mid-term exam (problem-solving). For these percentages to apply, all set exercises must be submitted; failure to submit any of the mid-term exercises will result in a mark of 0 for that section. When marking the assignments, the student’s attendance and participation in class will be taken into account, accounting for 5 per cent of the final mark for the assignment. Assignments must be submitted by the relevant deadline. Under no circumstances will late submissions be accepted, except in justified cases. TO PASS THE COURSE, A MARK OF 5/10 IS REQUIRED. REGULAR EXAM SESSION: Students who have not been able to pass through continuous assessment may sit the FINAL EXAMINATION in the ordinary examination period, provided they have complied with the provisions of the Student Assessment Regulations. A practical examination will be held; for this purpose, students will be required to complete exercises similar in nature to those set during the course, covering all the topics studied, to be completed within the three-hour duration of the exam. SPECIAL SESSION: All students, without exception, who have not passed the module through continuous assessment or in the ordinary examination session, may sit the FINAL EXAMINATION in the extraordinary examination session, following the same procedure. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 36 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
SECOND FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0241820 | Industrial Electronics | OB | 6 | ||||
Industrial ElectronicsCódigo: 0241820 Imprimir Course 3. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives This module provides an initial introduction to the core content of Electronics. The aim is to provide students with a broad overview of electronics in general, covering both analogue and digital systems. Prerequisites Knowledge of circuit theory Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 Ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, which are aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 Ability to solve problems with initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG7 The ability to analyse and assess the social and environmental impact of technical solutions. CG8 Ability to organise and plan within a business context, as well as in other institutions and organisations. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the relevant legislation in the practice of the profession of Industrial Technical Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE13 Knowledge of the fundamentals of electronics. Learning outcomes RA1 To understand the fundamentals of analogue and digital electronics. LA2 Understand the main components used in the design of analogue electronic circuits. LA3 Understand the basic components required to design a digital electronic system. LA4 Understand the principles governing the operation of memory and microprocessors. LA5 Be able to design, simulate and build electronic circuits in the laboratory, obtain results and draw conclusions from them. RA10 Be able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. Course content - General concepts. V, I, DC, AC, Vpp, Pi, Vef/Vrms, Vmax, F, T, P, C - Use of laboratory equipment (power supply, multimeter, oscilloscope, function generator) - Use of the SPICE simulator - Resistors and capacitors - Electromagnetism, inductors, differential signals, impedances and R-C-L filters - Semiconductors. Diodes, bipolar transistors - Semiconductors: FETs, MOSFETs, thyristors and triacs - Voltage regulation - Digital signals, logic gates, logic families - Commonly used components (sensors, actuators, ICs) - Basic programming of digital systems (Arduino) Training activities A1 Classroom-based presentation of concepts relating to the topics covered in each subject and problem-solving exercises designed to help students understand how to tackle these topics, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A2 Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems independently. A3 Carrying out projects in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- Two theory mid-term exams (Analogue Electronics, Digital Electronics) will be held, each accounting for 30 per cent of the final mark (total 60 per cent). Thirteen laboratory sessions will be held; attendance and completion of these will together account for 20 per cent of the final mark. Students must submit a practical assignment, the assessment of which accounts for 20 per cent of the final mark. In order to pass the course within the academic year, students must achieve a mark of five out of ten or higher in each mid-term exam, as well as in the laboratory sessions and the practical assignment. If a student does not pass the module during the academic year, they must sit the ordinary examination, which will cover the entire syllabus. If a student has passed the course, they may, if they wish, sit the ordinary examination session in order to improve their mark; the higher of the marks from the ordinary examination session and the mid-term examinations will be retained. They may also submit a new practical assignment or improve on the one already submitted in order to improve their mark, provided this is done no later than the date of the ordinary examination session. If a student fails to pass the module at the end of the academic year, and also fails the ordinary resit, they must sit the extraordinary resit examination, which will cover the entire syllabus. Ordinary examination session: A theory exam covering the course content, accounting for 60% of the final mark; marks for practical work and assignments will be retained and will account for 40% of the final mark. Students may resubmit their practical assignment if they wish. Extraordinary examination session: A theory exam covering the course content, accounting for 60% of the final mark, whilst marks for practical work and assignments account for the remaining 40% of the final mark. Students may resubmit their practical work if they wish. Bibliography Essential: 1. Alejandro Alonso Puig Analogue and Digital Electronics, 2nd ed. Bookmundo. 2024. ISBN: 978-94-037-62 https://publishes.bookmundo.com/shop/index.php/catalog/product/view/id/819697 2.- Angulo Usategui, José Mª Modern Digital Electronics: Circuit Capture and Simulation Madrid: Paraninfo, 1996. 1996. ISBN: 8428320381 3. Cuesta García, Luis Miguel Digital Electronics: Boolean Algebra, Combinational Circuits Madrid [etc.]: McGraw-Hill, 1996. 1996. ISBN: 8476158432 4. Espí López, José Fundamentals of Analogue Electronics Valencia: University of Valencia, 2006. 2006. ISBN: 9788437065601 5. García Zubía, Javier Solved Problems in Digital Electronics Australia [etc.]: Thomson, 2003. 2003. ISBN: 8497321952 6. Pleite Guerra, Jorge Analogue Electronics for Engineers Madrid: McGraw-Hill, 2009. 2009. ISBN: 9788448168858 Supplementary: 7.- Horn, Delton T. Basic Electronics Mexico: Interamericana, 1984. 1984. ISBN: 9682509300 |
|||||||
| 0341518 | Design Engineering Laboratory 3 | OB | 6 | ||||
Design Engineering Laboratory 3Código: 0341518 Imprimir Course 3. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives Building on the principles that promote the creation, management and implementation of inclusive and integrative design processes, we will proceed to define an interdisciplinary proposal that goes beyond design, to establish links between various disciplines such as ergonomics, multisensory perception, economics, the social sciences… with the primary aim of designing objects, environments and systems centred on human beings as physical, psychological, social and emotional entities in relation to environmental, instrumental and organisational conditions. Prerequisites No prior requirements are necessary. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK1 Understands the language of graphics and visual design, as well as the tools of expression and representation, in order to communicate and test designs. These tools will provide a broad scope for the development of guiding ideas and the fluent communication of concepts and designs. These tools encompass all the traditional methods of artistic drawing, technical drawing and standardisation, volumetric studies, models and prototypes, as well as computer-aided graphic and industrial design, to verify whether the product meets the specified requirements. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RS1 Takes a holistic view of the various dimensions that come together in products: aesthetic, semiotic, functional, typological and technological, in order to make ideas tangible and bring product design concepts to life. RS2 Applies their knowledge to product design solutions by using drawing tools and specialised software to determine the most appropriate way to communicate their work to third parties, whether or not they are experts in the field, using conceptual or visual skills to communicate ideas and concepts in a clear and effective manner, whilst selecting the most appropriate media and content. RS3 Applies the fundamentals of social innovation and user-centred design through user analysis in industrial design engineering projects to support the professional development of the Industrial Design Engineer. RS4 Identifies specific opportunities based on an analysis of users’ real needs, signals and trends, transforming these into new solutions that deliver value in a sustainable and systematic manner. RS5 Possesses the tools, skills and knowledge required to transform relevant problems or opportunities into solutions that add value for users, businesses and society. COMPETENCIES RC1 Possesses the ability to create new products and services, drawing on engineering knowledge of the materials that make up the technological environment as a source of value, and the relationship between emotion and the product to create the optimal experience in the product-human-society interaction and to respond to society’s demand for products, concepts and services. This involves the ability to analyse, synthesise and make appropriate decisions in order to identify and solve problems or practical cases based on given specifications. RC2 Designs innovative new products, systems, services and experiences, guiding them through their various phases to ensure objectives are met, whilst integrating aspects relating to the emotional, social and cultural spheres into their specifications, in line with business strategy. RC3 Possesses the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. Course content Solving problems of medium complexity, based on user-centred design User analysis. Emotional design. Design for all. Service design Design for social innovation Training activities AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and practical skills and abilities relating to a specific topic. AP5 – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE4. – Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) collected in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course is assessed, with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place Assessment systems MINIMUM MAXIMUM SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 0% MAXIMUM 30% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 40% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 90% Assessment criteria: The module is assessed on an annual basis or during the examination periods established by the university for this purpose. Per term: students may pass the course by sitting the three mid-term exams held during the term, each accounting for 25% of the final mark; the minimum mark required for each mid-term exam to be included in the average with the other two is 3 marks. The remaining 25 per cent will be based on a research project set during the first few weeks of the term, which students must submit by the end of the term. Therefore, the assessment percentages for the course are as follows: First project 25% Second project 25% Third project 25% Final knowledge assessments 25% |
|||||||
| 0341519 | Ergonomic Aspects of Design | OB | 6 | ||||
Ergonomic Aspects of DesignCódigo: 0341519 Imprimir Course 3. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The main objectives are to provide students with the necessary basic knowledge, both scientific and practical, to integrate ergonomics into product design and to apply this knowledge to the design of a specific product using an appropriate methodology. The aim is not only to raise students’ awareness so that they always take the human factor into account in their designs, but also to provide them with a clear understanding of how this factor affects the design of products or environments, and to ensure that they themselves are aware of the need to consider these factors and are able to apply these concepts. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK2 Understands the Fundamentals and Techniques Supporting Design: Methodology of Industrial Design Engineering; Design thinking, Ergonomics, Anthropometry and Biomechanics; Fundamental elements of graphic design; history of design; strategic and operational marketing, enabling students to make and justify decisions, communicate effectively and draw conclusions in the field of industrial design engineering in order to achieve optimal designs. SKILLS AND COMPETENCIES RS5 Possesses the tools, skills and knowledge necessary to transform relevant problems or opportunities into solutions that add value for users, businesses and society. COMPETENCIES RC1 Possesses the ability to create new products and services, drawing on engineering knowledge of the materials that make up the technological environment and the relationship between emotion and product to create the optimal experience in human-product interaction-society, with a view to responding to society’s demand for products, concepts and services. This involves the ability to analyse, synthesise and make sound decisions in order to identify and resolve problems or practical cases based on given specifications. RODS Develops effective communication, teamwork, analytical thinking, creativity and ethical leadership from a cross-disciplinary perspective, clearly inspired by democratic principles and values, as well as the Sustainable Development Goals, in order to operate with integrity in the professional sphere. Description of the content Concept and fields of application of Ergonomics. Anthropometry. Biomechanics and Physiology. Ergonomics and Design Ergonomics and design methodology. Ergonomic assessment methods TOPIC 1. Ergonomics. General principles. Concept and fields of application of Ergonomics. Regulations. TOPIC 2. Anthropometry. Concept. Anthropometric data: statistical distribution, types of data, data management and handling, factors relating to human diversity. Anthropometric design: types of constraints and criteria, fit tests and the limits method, manikins and models Static anthropometry: accuracy, corrections, standard postures, data Functional anthropometry: reach and access data. TOPIC 3. Biomechanics and Physiology. Concept. Basic concepts of human physiology applicable to ergonomics: musculoskeletal structure, vision, hearing, thermoregulation, metabolic rate. Anthropometry for biomechanics: ranges of motion, muscle strength. Biomechanics of seated posture. Biomechanics of the hand. TOPIC 4. Ergonomics and Furniture Design. TOPIC 5. Ergonomics and the design of tools and implements. TOPIC 6. Ergonomics and workplace design. TOPIC 7. Ergonomics and design methodology. Integrating Ergonomics into Product Design. Stages of product design and development Product planning Product design based on ergonomic design criteria Training activities AP1 – Lectures Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the field, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which an in-depth study of a specific subject is carried out. These promote reflective and inquisitive participation by students. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP4: -Preparation of assignments or projects and resolution of challenges This is a teacher-led activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired knowledge and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the module and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. Assessment systems MAXIMUM SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 30% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 40% MAXIMUM 60% SE3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 30% The relative weights indicated take into account the number of ECTS credits for the learning activities through which the assessed competences are acquired. Student assessment will be carried out through continuous assessment; to this end, the lecturer will set three eliminatory mid-term exams to enable students to demonstrate the level of knowledge they have acquired. Furthermore, as knowledge acquired without proper practical application is of no value whatsoever, two practical application exercises will be set throughout the semester. Consequently, the percentages to be applied in the continuous assessment are as follows: 40 per cent: practical exercises and laboratory reports. 70%: 2 theoretical mid-term exams. The exercises must be submitted by the relevant deadline. To pass the module, students must achieve 5 out of 10. These percentages will only apply to students who have submitted all practical exercises by the relevant deadline and have sat both theoretical mid-term exams. REGULAR EXAM SESSION All other students will only be eligible for assessment via the final exam in the regular assessment period; late submissions to improve the final mark, or any other assessment marks during the academic year, will not be taken into account. The mark for the ordinary examination period will be based 100% on the final exam. No other assessment marks during the academic year will be taken into account. EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSION The mark for the supplementary examination will be based entirely on the final exam. No other assessment marks from the academic year will be taken into account. |
|||||||
| 0341520 | Design Management and Entrepreneurship | OB | 3 | ||||
Design Management and EntrepreneurshipCódigo: 0341520 Imprimir Course 3. Second-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of the module is to identify the points of contact between the design process and finance. It involves: • Defining a business plan for the implementation of the product and service proposal • Analysing the design process within organisations • Understanding the tools for measuring the return on investment in design • Measuring the economic impact of design • Developing an economic and financial feasibility study for a product and service • Align the company’s strategy, the user experience and the economic context of design. Prerequisites There are no prerequisites. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RS3 Applies the fundamentals of social innovation and user-centred design through user analysis in industrial design engineering projects to support the professional development of industrial design engineers. RS4 Identifies current and future opportunities for various stakeholders (users, clients, suppliers) in order to define the specifications for new products and services or to launch new businesses. RS5 Possesses the tools, skills and knowledge necessary to transform relevant problems or opportunities into solutions that add value for users, businesses and society. COMPETENCIES RC1 Possesses the ability to create new products and services, drawing on engineering knowledge of the materials that make up the technological environment as a source of value, and the relationship between emotion and the product to create the optimal experience in the product-human-society interaction and to respond to society’s demand for products, concepts and services. This involves the ability to analyse, synthesise and make appropriate decisions in order to identify and resolve problems or practical cases based on given specifications. Course description Fundamentals of design project leadership and management Agile methodologies for design project management Strategic design management within organisations Entrepreneurship and new business models Economic and financial feasibility study of a product Feasibility of a product launch. Drawing up a business plan. Fundamentals of accounting and financial management. Defining and launching a new product or business. The economic impact of design. Return on investment in design. Sources and methods of financing. Training activities AP2 – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which students undertake an in-depth study of a specific subject. These activities encourage reflective and inquisitive participation from students. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each subject. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP4: -Preparation of assignments or projects and resolution of challenges This is a teacher-led activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired learning and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the regular examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE4. – Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output), compiled in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course, is assessed with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 50% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 50% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 30% |
|||||||
| 0341522 | Marketing and Advertising | OB | 3 | ||||
Marketing and AdvertisingCódigo: 0341522 Imprimir Course 3. Second-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RFK1 Understands the behaviour of businesses and markets, and the importance of integrating engineering into industrial design within industry and in the local, national and international economy. RK19 Possesses knowledge relating to: the professional development of Industrial Design and Product Development Engineers, in both the public and private sectors; industrial and intellectual property; trade mark law, utility models and patents; Registration of industrial designs. Product liability. Legal aspects of safety. EU marking. Strategic and operational marketing. SKILLS AND COMPETENCIES RS13 Possesses the tools, skills and knowledge necessary to transform relevant problems or opportunities into solutions that add value for users, businesses and society. COMPETENCIES RFC3 Possesses the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. RC16 Identifies current and future opportunities for various stakeholders (users, customers, suppliers) in order to define the specifications for new products and services or to launch new businesses. Course content Concept and scope of marketing. Strategic and operational functions. Market research techniques. Operational marketing tools: product, price, distribution and communication. Brand and product communication: advertising. Teaching activities AP2 – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which students undertake an in-depth study of a specific subject. These activities encourage students to engage in reflective and inquisitive participation. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Providing context, explanation and clarification of key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each module. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP4: -Preparation of assignments or projects and resolution of challenges This is a teacher-led activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired knowledge and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows assignments and/or exercises to be submitted via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE4.- Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) collected in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course is assessed, with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place. Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 50% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 50% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 30% |
|||||||
| 0341523 | Prototyping and Computer-Aided Manufacturing | OB | 3 | ||||
Prototyping and Computer-Aided ManufacturingCódigo: 0341523 Imprimir Course 3. Second-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this module is to introduce students to the field of manufacturing process automation and CNC programming for the mechanical manufacture of complex parts, and to the use of CAD/CAM technologies. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. C26 Basic knowledge of production and manufacturing systems SKILLS AND ABILITIES C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. C8 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. COMPETENCIES C1 Ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of industrial engineering aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. C4 Ability to solve problems with initiative, decision-making and creativity, to think critically, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. C16 Ability to visualise in three dimensions and knowledge of graphic representation techniques, both through traditional methods of metric and descriptive geometry and through computer-aided design applications. C30 Knowledge and skills to apply engineering graphics techniques. C36 Knowledge and skills for the application of materials engineering. C37 Applied knowledge of manufacturing systems and processes, metrology and quality control. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK16 Possesses knowledge of IT tools enabling them to work with existing Computer-Aided Design (CAD), Computer-Aided Manufacturing (CAM) and Computer-Aided Engineering (CAE) software, and to integrate these into industrial design and product development. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RFS5 Has a command of various 2D and 3D design and drafting tools and programmes, including CAD, CAM and CAE, which help students to integrate this language, equipping them with the digital skills essential for their future careers, enabling them to communicate and test their designs. COMPETENCIES RFC3 Possesses an understanding of the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. RC13 Has a command of computer-aided simulation, CAD/CAM/CAE tools that enable them to analyse the behaviour of parts, sub-assemblies or mechanical systems in order to analyse the results and draw conclusions; to carry out automated prototyping so as to be able to communicate, manufacture and test their designs; and to programme simulation tools for manufacturing processes in order to optimise them. Course content Concurrent Engineering Computer-Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) Computer-aided manufacturing process simulation Rapid Prototyping Introduction to CAM systems. Simulation, analysis and calculation of manufacturing processes involving forming, plastic deformation and material removal. Automated prototype manufacturing. Course syllabus: 3. Topic 1: Computer-Aided Manufacturing 1.1. CAD/CAM systems 1.2. CAM software: pre-processing 1.3. CAM software: processing 1.4. CAM programming 2. Topic 2: Computer-Aided Manufacturing (CAM) 2.1. 2D and 3D CAD/CAM software. 2.1.1. SolidWorks 2.1.2. CamWorks 2.2. Machining strategies: Pre-processing. 2.3. 3D post-processing. Training activities AP1. – Lectures Lecture-based sessions in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the subject, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and hands-on skills and abilities relating to a specific topic. AP5 – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, according to their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the regular examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows assignments and/or exercises to be submitted via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. SE4. Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) collected in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course is assessed, with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 60% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 60% SE3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 0% MAXIMUM 30% SE4 Portfolio 10% 30% Assessment criteria: The mark for continuous assessment consists of a laboratory mark and an examination mark. − LABORATORY MARK: Average mark for the 9 laboratory practicals carried out throughout the course. THE PRACTICALS ARE COMPULSORY and for each one, the student must submit a report which will be assessed. − EXAM MARK: The average mark of two exams: − Exam 1 (Topics 1 and 2) − Exam 2 (Topics 3 and 4) The final mark is weighted as follows: 35% for the exam mark and 65% for the laboratory mark. REGULAR AND SUPPLEMENTARY ASSESSMENT The LABORATORY MARK will be retained if it is 5 or above. Otherwise, the student will have to sit the laboratory section of the final exam. The EXAM MARK is NOT carried over, and students who fail the continuous assessment will sit the final exam covering the entire syllabus. |
|||||||
| 0341524 | Machine Theory and Simulation | OB | 6 | ||||
Machine Theory and SimulationCódigo: 0341524 Imprimir Course 3. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives 1) To identify the most common machine elements in industrial plant, and to understand their characteristics and applications. 2) Select or size machine components for industrial plant. 3) Computer-based kinematic and dynamic simulation of mechanisms. Select and size machine components for industrial plant. Prerequisites Knowledge of the following subjects: Physics, Mathematics, Materials and Technical Drawing. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. C24 Knowledge of the principles of the theory of machines and mechanisms. SKILLS AND ABILITIES C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. C8 Ability to apply the principles and methods of quality management. COMPETENCIES C1 Ability to draft, approve and carry out projects in the field of industrial engineering which are aimed, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. C4 Ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making and creativity, to use critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK10 Possesses knowledge of the principles of strength of materials. RK25 Understands the principles of the theory of machines and mechanisms. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RFS2 Selects existing or emerging industrial technologies, manufacturing processes and materials that add value to the proposed products, taking into account optimisation, sustainable production and economic viability. RS5 Identifies the technical principles associated with the processes resulting from the application of loads to solid bodies: tension, bending and torsion, and their effects on materials for the design and modelling of mechanical components. COMPETENCIES RFC3 Possesses the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. Course content Kinematic Analysis of Articulated Mechanisms Cam and eccentric mechanisms. Temporary couplings: Clutches and Brakes. Gears Kinematic Simulation of Mechanisms The topics are organised as follows: Topic 1: Kinematic analysis of articulated mechanisms. 1.1 Description of simple articulated mechanisms: articulated quadrilateral, crank-connecting rod and slide. 1.2 Graphical methods for the analysis of simple articulated mechanisms: - Determination of trajectories. - Velocity analysis. - Analysis of accelerations. Topic 2: Cam and Eccentric Mechanisms. 2.1 Types of cams, depending on the motion of the cam and the follower. 2.2 Cam motion: displacement diagram. 2.3 Upstroke and return strokes. Topic 3: Temporary couplings: Clutches and Brakes. 3.1 Drum Clutches and Brakes 3.2 Axial-connection clutches and brakes. 3.3 Belt clutches and brakes. Topic 4: Gears. 4.1 Cylindrical spur gears. 4.2 Helical cylindrical gears. 4.3 Transmission of forces in gears. 4.4 Gear trains. Laboratory practicals: - Laboratory practicals on articulated mechanisms, cams, timing couplings and gears will be carried out in the workshop. - A practical session on the kinematic simulation of mechanisms will be held in the Computer Laboratory. Teaching activities AP1. Lecture sessions Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the subject, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, providing an in-depth study of a specific subject. They encourage reflective and inquisitive participation from students. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and practical skills and abilities relating to a specific subject area. AP4: - Development of assignments or projects and problem-solving This is a teacher-guided activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired learning and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 50% SE2 Final knowledge tests MINIMUM 40% MAXIMUM 60% SE3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 40% Assessment Criteria: 1) Continuous Assessment: - Test 1 (Topics 1 and 2): 20%. - Test 2 (Topic 3): 20%. - Test 3 (Topic 4): 20 per cent. - Laboratory Practical Sessions: 40 per cent. 2) Regular Assessment: Students who do not pass the course through continuous assessment will sit a final exam for the course, which will account for 60 per cent of the final mark. The remaining 40 per cent corresponds to the laboratory mark obtained through continuous assessment. 3) Resit: Students who do not pass the module in the Ordinary Assessment Period will sit a final examination for the module, which will account for 60 per cent of the final mark. The remaining 40 per cent corresponds to the laboratory mark obtained through continuous assessment. |
|||||||
| TOTAL: | 33 | ||||||
Year 4
ANNUAL SUBJECTS
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0441507 | External Academic Placements | OB | 6 | ||
External Academic PlacementsCódigo: 0441507 Imprimir Year 4. Annual module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
|
|||||
| TOTAL: | 6 | ||||
FIRST FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0341814 | Fluid Mechanics | OB | 6 | ||||
Fluid MechanicsCódigo: 0341814 Imprimir Course 4. First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives As an introductory course in Fluid Mechanics, it has three objectives: the first is to apply the principles of mechanics and thermodynamics to fluid systems, deriving the equations governing motion and introducing the concepts and tools necessary for their physical understanding; the second objective is to study, from a practical perspective, problems that commonly arise in engineering; and the third is to reinforce the concepts of greatest interest from an applied perspective, through experimental work in the laboratory Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Learning Outcomes Basic and general competences CG1 The ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG7 The ability to analyse and assess the social and environmental impact of technical solutions. CG8 Ability to organise and plan within the context of a company, and other institutions and organisations. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the relevant legislation in the practice of the profession of Industrial Technical Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE10 Knowledge of the basic principles of fluid mechanics and their application to problem-solving in the field of engineering. Calculation of pipes, channels and fluid systems. Learning outcomes RA1 Understanding the basic principles governing the motion of fluids LA1 Understand the basic principles governing the motion of fluids LA3 Be able to apply dimensional analysis and physical similarity in the study of models. LA4 Be able to calculate pipelines, channels and fluid systems. LA5 Use pressure, flow rate and velocity measuring instruments in the laboratory to calculate fluid systems, obtain results and draw conclusions RA6 Be able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. Course content 1. Introduction to fluid mechanics 2. Fluid kinematics 3. Fluid mechanics equations in integral form 4. Dimensional analysis 5. Equations of fluid mechanics in differential form 6. Fluid statics Teaching activities A1 Classroom presentation of concepts relating to the topics covered in each subject and problem-solving exercises to enable students to understand how to tackle them, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A2 Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems independently. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be categorised into three types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s individual study. - E2: Reports on laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Assessment criteria: The module comprises 3 hours of classes per week (lectures and seminars for problem-solving) and 15 hours of laboratory work in 3-hour sessions, comprising a total of 5 compulsory practical sessions. Two mid-term exams will be held during the term. The Laboratory Practical mark accounts for 20% (5PL + Test), whilst the average mark from the two mid-term exams, the final exam or the resit exam will account for 80%. Students may pass the module through continuous assessment provided they have completed all 5 laboratory practicals and their mark [80% (average of 2 mid-term exams) + 20% (5 laboratory practicals + test)] is greater than 5 percentage points. Students who do not pass the module through continuous assessment must sit a comprehensive exam covering the entire module during the ordinary or supplementary examination period; this will account for 100% of the final mark for the module. |
|||||||
| 0341816 | Automatic Control | OB | 6 | ||||
Automatic ControlCódigo: 0341816 Imprimir Course 4. First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this module is to focus on the study, analysis and design of continuous control systems. Systems theory is based on the idea that the reality around us consists not of isolated entities but of interrelated sets or systems, and that the study of these systems can be approached in a unified manner, whether they are mechanical, electrical or chemical systems. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 The ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG7 The ability to analyse and assess the social and environmental impact of technical solutions. CG8 Ability to organise and plan within the context of a company, and other institutions and organisations. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the relevant legislation in the practice of the profession of Industrial Technical Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE14 Knowledge of the fundamentals of automation and control methods. Learning outcomes RA6 Understanding the fundamentals underpinning Control Systems and Automation. RA7 Apply the principles of automation and control to model and analyse dynamic systems. LA8 Analyse the transient and steady-state responses of systems and processes. LA9 Is able to design and simulate the dynamic behaviour of systems and processes in the laboratory. RA10 Be able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. Course content Principles of automatic control. Modelling and analysis of dynamic systems. Dynamic behaviour of systems. 1. Introduction to control systems and automation. 2. Control systems. Laplace transform. 2.1. Laplace transform of typical signals 2.2. Theorems and properties of the Laplace transform. 2.3. Inverse Laplace transform. 3. Automation and control. Mathematical modelling of dynamic systems 3.1. Introduction 3.2. Transfer function 3.3. Block diagram 3.4. Flow diagram 4. Automation and control. Dynamic systems in state space. 4.1. Modelling in State Space 4.2. Transfer Functions of Certain Physical Elements and Systems. 5. Analysis of the Transient Response of Systems and Processes 5.1. First-order systems, impulse response, unit step response, Response to a unit ramp. 5.2. Second-order systems, Types of damping, Impulse response, Unit Step Response, Specifications, Unit Ramp Response. 5.3. Routh–Hurwitz criterion. Stability of systems and processes 6. Analysis of the steady-state response of systems and processes 6.1. Steady-state error 6.2. Error constants 6.3. Errors in systems with non-unity feedback 7. Root locus. 7.1. Plotting the roots of the characteristic equation 7.2. Basic equations of the locus of roots. 7.3. General rules for constructing the locus of roots 7.4. Adding poles and zeros to a second-order system 8. Analysis of the frequency response of systems and processes 8.1. Calculation of system gain and phase 8.2. Bode plot 8.3. Frequency-domain specifications Learning activities A1 Classroom presentation of concepts relating to the topics covered in each subject and problem-solving exercises to enable students to understand how to tackle them, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A2 Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems independently. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be categorised into three types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s independent study. - E2: Reports on laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Assessment criteria: - 1st Mid-term exam: 25% - 2nd Partial Exam: 50% - Assignment 1: Automation and control of machines, processes and systems: 5% - Management of computerised systems: 10% - Practical work: 5% - Practical exam: 5% For the regular June exam and the resit in July: Students’ marks for the subject will be based on the two mid-term exams, which will account for 75 per cent of the final mark. The remaining 25 per cent will be based on the work placement, the assigned assignment and the assessment of computerised process management. |
|||||||
| 0441508 | Legal Aspects of Design and the Product | OB | 3 | ||||
Legal Aspects of Design and the ProductCódigo: 0441508 Imprimir Course 4. First-semester module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of the module is for students to acquire an in-depth understanding of the legal framework governing industrial property law and how this legal framework provides the right holder with effective protection against third parties in relation to their creative works. The aim of acquiring this knowledge is to equip students with the necessary skills to apply it and resolve real-world problems and situations, for which the following is required: - An understanding of the basic legal concepts relating to industrial property. - Practical application of the regulations to initiate and complete a patent application process. - An analysis of the procedures used by the Spanish Patent and Trade Mark Office (OEPM). - Monitoring of case studies relating to design registration. - Analysis of unfair competition and the protection of creative works. - Knowledge of the legal aspects relevant to the practice of the profession: types and categories of companies and the process of setting them up. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 SKILLS AND COMPETENCIES C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. C8 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. COMPETENCIES C11 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the legislation required for practising as an Industrial Technical Engineer. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RFK1 Understands the behaviour of businesses and markets, and the importance of integrating engineering into industrial design within industry and within the local, national and international economy. RK19 Possesses knowledge relating to: the professional development of Industrial Design and Product Development Engineers, in both the public and private sectors; industrial and intellectual property; trade mark law, utility models and patents; Registration of industrial designs. Product liability. Legal aspects of safety. EU marking. Strategic and operational marketing COMPETENCIES RFC3 Possesses an understanding of the principles of engineering design and analysis, and of the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. Course content Product liability. EU marking. Legal aspects of professional practice. The programme is structured in five parts: The first part, which is introductory in nature, introduces students to industrial property law, its legal nature and the various elements that comprise it. The second part focuses on those industrial property rights aimed at protecting inventions, analysing the types of protection available for industrial creations: patents, utility models and industrial designs. The third part examines so-called distinctive signs, such as: Trademarks, trade names, business names, domain names and geographical indications; and, fourthly, we focus on what are known as industrial design protection rights, analysing their legal protection. Finally, the analysis of the subject matter concludes by introducing students to the law on unfair competition as an instrument provided by our legal system, alongside industrial property law, for the protection of various creations Thematic Unit 1 Topic 1: Industrial Property Law. Legal nature and constituent elements. Topic 2: Industrial and intellectual property. The Law on Trade Marks, Utility Models and Patents. Registration of industrial designs. Industrial Inventions. – 1. Patent Law; 1.2. Concept and requirements for patentability; – 1.3. Procedure for obtaining a patent; – 1.4. Scope of patent rights; – 1.5. Assignment and licences.- 1.6 Invalidity and expiry. – 1.7 International patents. – 2. Utility models. – 3. Industrial designs. – 3.1 Legal framework. – 3.2 The industrial design as an object of protection.- 3.3 Requirements for protection.- 3.4 Registration procedure.- 3.5 Term and scope of the right.- 3.6 Invalidity and expiry of the design.- 3.7 Community designs. Topic 3: Distinctive Signs: Trade Marks, Shop Signs, Trade Names, Domain Names and Geographical Indications. 1. Trade marks.- 1.1. Concept and classes of trade marks.- 1.2 Application procedure.- 1.3 Registration procedure.- 1.4 Duration and scope of trade mark rights.- 1.5 Assignment and licensing of trade marks.- 1.6 Termination of trade mark rights: invalidity and revocation. – 1.7 Community trade marks and international trade marks. – 2. Business signs. – 3. Trade names. – 4. Domain names. – 5. Geographical indications. Thematic Unit 2 Topic 4: Product liability. 1. Legal liability. Topic 5: Legal Aspects of Safety. 1. Legal Framework. – 2. Industrial Safety. – 3. Standardisation Bodies. Thematic Unit 3 Topic 6: EU Marking. 1. Definition. 2. Characteristics of the Directives. 3. Main stages for affixing the ‘CE’ marking. Topic 7: Unfair Competition. 1. Concept and prerequisites. – 2. Unfair Competition Act. Subjective, objective and territorial scope. – 3. Specific cases: Acts contrary to the interests of competitors, acts contrary to the interests of consumers, acts contrary to the market. – 4. Legal actions arising from unfair competition. Thematic Unit 4 Topic 8: Legal aspects of practising the profession. 1. Obligations and contracts: civil, commercial and employment.- 2. The company: types.- 3. Ways of setting up a company.- 4. Contractual arrangements in civil, commercial and employment law.- 5. Types of companies.- 6. Business internationalisation. Training activities AP1 – Lectures Lecture-based sessions in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the field, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2.- Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, providing an in-depth study of a specific subject. They encourage students to engage in reflective and inquisitive participation. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP4: -Preparation of assignments or projects and resolution of challenges This is a teacher-led activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired knowledge and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the module and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE4. – Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) collected in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course is assessed, with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 50% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 50% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 30% Two exams on the course content, each accounting for 30% of the mark; three practical exercises to be presented in class, each accounting for 10% of the mark. 10 per cent of the practical assessment will be based on: attendance, participation in class and respect for the lecturer and fellow students. |
|||||||
| 0441509 | Technology Project Management. Technical Department | OB | 6 | ||||
Technology Project Management. Technical DepartmentCódigo: 0441509 Imprimir Course 4. First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives • To provide students with the necessary theoretical and practical knowledge regarding the concept of a project: its definition, planning, presentation (documents) and monitoring and control. • To introduce students to the standard tools and techniques for the overall management of a project, including IT management tools • To enable students to carry out a preliminary economic and financial assessment of a project, as well as its monitoring and final evaluation. • To provide guidance on the professional role of the Industrial Design and Product Development Engineer within a company, in relation to the implementation of projects. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been established. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. SKILLS AND ABILITIES C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. C8 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. COMPETENCIES C1 Ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of industrial engineering which are intended, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. C2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. C4 Ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. C9 Ability to organise and plan within the context of a company and other institutions and organisations. C10 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. C11 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the relevant legislation in the practice of the profession of Industrial Technical Engineer. C29 Knowledge and skills to organise and manage projects. Understanding the organisational structure and functions of a project office. Learning Outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK14 Knows the organisational structure and functions of a Technical Office SKILLS AND ABILITIES RS7 Manages information and documentation relating to product development projects in a comprehensive and future-proof manner, expanding on existing knowledge from an innovation perspective to produce project documentation, proposing alternatives, justifying proposals and drawing conclusions. COMPETENCIES RFC1 Designs innovative new products, systems, services and experiences through their various phases to ensure objectives are met, integrating aspects relating to the emotional, social and cultural spheres into their specifications, in line with business strategy. RFC3 Possesses the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. RFC4 Co-ordinates projects in the field of industrial design engineering and product development, drawing on their knowledge of the concept, structure and various phases of an industrial design engineering and product development project, as well as the knowledge required for its economic evaluation, and the planning and control of the necessary technical, financial and human resources. RC7 Develops projects in the field of industrial engineering through the organisation and management of projects, taking into account current standards, legislation and regulations to support the professional development of the industrial design engineer. Course content description Projects: General theory. Phases and planning of project activities Project documentation Economic and financial analysis of projects Technical office and company Independent practice of the profession. Drawing up estimates and technical specifications TOPIC 1: Projects: General theory. • Definition of a project. Types of project • Project participants. • Phases and planning of project activities. TOPIC 2: Project documents • Design brief: aspects to include • Project report • Graphic representations and visual aids: sketches, conceptual designs, plans, prototypes, etc. TOPIC 3: Economic and financial analysis of projects. • Budgeting a project • Economic aspects: types of expenditure, revenue, profits. • Financial aspects: types of financing, cash flow. • Introduction to profitability analysis ratios TOPIC 4: Technical department and the company. • Organisational structures of companies. • The role of the Design Engineer within the company TOPIC 5: Independent practice of the profession: general aspects to bear in mind Training activities AP1.- Lectures Lectures in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the field, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP2. – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, providing an in-depth study of a specific subject. They encourage students to engage in reflective and inquisitive participation. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each course. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. AP4: -Preparation of assignments or projects and resolution of challenges This is a teacher-led activity in which students must carry out an assignment or project within a set timeframe to address real-life complex situations or problems through the planning, design and implementation of a series of interrelated and coordinated activities, based on the development and application of acquired knowledge and the effective use of resources. In addition, the teacher may organise the presentation of results and conclusions through an oral presentation. AP5. – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, according to their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. SE4. – Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) collected in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course is assessed, with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place. SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 40% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 40% MAXIMUM 50% SE3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 20% MAXIMUM 40% CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT: * ASSIGNMENTS: -Presentation 1: Partial development in the form of a preliminary project........... Weighting 10% -Presentation 2: Project development...................................... Weighting 20% - MS Project assignment............................................................... Weighting 10% * MS PROJECT PRACTICAL EXERCISES........................................................ Weighting 7.5% * MID-TERM EXAMS: -Mid-term exam (MG)........................................................ Weighting 15% -Mid-term exam (SM)........................................................ Weighting 30% * SM Assignments:.................................................. Weighting 7.5% To pass the module, students must achieve 5 out of 10 marks. There are no minimum marks, but students who do not achieve 5 marks must sit the entire module in the supplementary examination session. Under no circumstances will parts of the module be carried over from one examination session to the next. REGULAR JANUARY SESSION OR EXTRAORDINARY JULY SESSION: STUDENTS WHO DO NOT PASS THE COURSE THROUGH CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT WILL BE REQUIRED TO TAKE A FINAL EXAM, WHICH WILL ACCOUNT FOR 70% OF THE GRADE. THE REMAINING 30% WILL BE BASED ON THE AVERAGE MARK FOR THE ASSIGNMENTS COMPLETED |
|||||||
| 0441510 | Design Engineering Laboratory 4 | OB | 6 | ||||
Design Engineering Laboratory 4Código: 0441510 Imprimir Course 4. First-semester module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Objectives To improve skills relating to conceptual design. Enhance creativity and project presentation skills Prerequisites To have completed the following modules: • Graphic Expression. • Artistic Expression. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 SKILLS AND ABILITIES C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. C8 Ability to apply quality principles and methods COMPETENCIES C1 Ability to draft, sign off and carry out projects in the field of industrial engineering aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. C2 Ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. C4 Ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. C7 Ability to analyse and assess the social and environmental impact of technical solutions. C9 Knowledge and skills to organise and manage projects. Understanding the organisational structure and functions of a project office. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK6 Understands the basic elements of systems analysis and the scientific method required to investigate and reason through a product design and development process. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RS3 Has a holistic view of the various dimensions that converge in products: aesthetic, semiotic, functional, typological and technological, in order to make ideas tangible and bring product design concepts to life. RS11 Use technology as a source of inspiration for creative proposals and for shaping new scenarios that foster more connected, efficient and sustainable societies, thereby shaping the future user experience. RS14 Uses technology as a source of inspiration for creative proposals, in shaping new scenarios that foster more connected, efficient and sustainable societies, and which in turn shape the future user experience. COMPETENCIES RFC1 Designs innovative new products, systems, services and experiences through their various phases to ensure that objectives are met, integrating aspects relating to the emotional, social and cultural spheres into their specifications, in line with business strategy. RFC2 Possesses the capacity for original creation to respond to society’s demand for products, concepts and services, which involves the ability to analyse, synthesise and make appropriate decisions in order to identify and resolve problems or practical cases based on given specifications. RFC3 Possesses the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. RFC4 They coordinate projects in the field of industrial design engineering and product development thanks to their knowledge of the concept, structure and various phases of an industrial design engineering and product development project, as well as the knowledge required for its economic evaluation, the planning and control of activities and the necessary technical, economic and human resources. RC5 Determines the most suitable manufacturing process for any type of part, based on technical and economic criteria. Optimises the parameters of the manufacturing process with the aim of achieving efficient production. RC7 Develops projects in the field of industrial engineering through project organisation and management, taking into account current standards, legislation and regulations to support the professional development of the industrial design engineer. RC8 Possesses the ability to create new products, services and environments—whether real or conceptualised and designed—by drawing on engineering knowledge of the materials that make up the technological environment, and the relationship between emotion and product, to create the optimal experience in the product-human-society interaction RC10 Applies a comprehensive product development methodology from an engineering perspective to support the professional development of industrial design engineers. RC11 Applies their knowledge to product design solutions through the use of drawing tools and specialised design software to determine the most appropriate way to communicate their work to third parties, whether or not they are experts in the field, making use of visual skills that communicate ideas and concepts in a clear and effective manner, whilst selecting the most appropriate media and content. Course description Technological product design. Product engineering in the new digital context New products: technology and innovation Technology and feasibility in product design Detailed design of new products Completion of two projects. 1st: Train Interiors: Students must apply all the knowledge acquired over previous years by undertaking a large-scale project. 2. Micro-design project for mass-market consumer goods Training activities AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and practical skills and abilities relating to a specific topic. AP5 – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the module and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, depending on their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE4. – Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) collected in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course is assessed, with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place Assessment systems SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 0% MAXIMUM 30% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 40% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 90% The assessment criteria are: 50% First Assignment 50% Second Assignment To pass via continuous assessment, students must pass both assignments. |
|||||||
| 0441812 | Environmental Engineering | OB | 3 | ||||
Environmental EngineeringCódigo: 0441812 Imprimir Course 4. First-semester module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives This module highlights the environmental issues arising from the industrial sector. It presents the technologies available for minimising the impact caused by human activity in general and by industry in particular. The overall objective of the proposed programme is for students to gain an understanding of the management methods currently used for the treatment and disposal of waste. Students will be equipped with the ability to: − Analyse environmental problems through the application of state-of-the-art technologies specifically applied to the industrial sector. − Identify and classify all types of waste generated by human activity. − Assess the environmental impacts across all industrial sectors using an integrated approach. − Analyse, characterise, manage, minimise and treat both industrial waste water and hazardous waste. − Understand the legislation applicable to each type of waste, particularly hazardous waste. − Presentation of a report detailing, for a given industrial sector and its geographical location: the facility’s compliance with the legal framework; a description of treatment processes for hazardous waste management; available technologies; and a description of internal management measures to minimise hazardous waste and improve its management. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 Ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG7 The ability to analyse and assess the social and environmental impact of technical solutions. CG8 Ability to organise and plan within the context of a company, and other institutions and organisations. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the relevant legislation in the practice of the profession of Industrial Technical Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE18 Basic knowledge and application of environmental technologies and sustainability. Learning outcomes RA6 Understanding the architecture of internal combustion engines and their thermodynamic cycles LA7 Understanding engine test methods and their application in the laboratory to carry out experimental analyses to evaluate state variables and characteristic curves. LO8 Be able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. Course content BLOCK A: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT BLOCK B: WATER POLLUTION Learning activities A1 Classroom presentation of concepts related to the topics comprising each subject and problem-solving exercises that enable students to understand how to tackle them, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group discussions, etc. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be divided into two types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s independent study. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Assessment criteria: BLOCK A. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT − PP1 (mid-term exam 1): 70% of the final mark for this block BLOCK B. WATER POLLUTION − PP2 Water (Partial Exam 2): 30% of the final mark for this block Students may be exempted from the content of each of the mid-term exams (PP1a and PP2a), provided they achieve a minimum mark of 4 marks in each. If a student’s mark for one of the partial exams is below 4 marks, they must sit an exam on that material during the ordinary examination session. REGULAR EXAMINATION SESSION: students who score less than 4 marks in PP1 and PP2 must sit the examination covering the content of that part during this session; the marks obtained in the parts passed, provided they exceed the minimum mark for each block, will be retained. Mark for the Ordinary Examination Period: The mark for the module in the ordinary examination period will be composed of the marks obtained in PP1 and PP2, the average of which will account for 80% of the module mark. The remaining 20 per cent (PT) will be obtained by completing and submitting an assignment via the Virtual Classroom. The topic and scope of the assignment will be defined during the course. To pass the module, the mark for the assignment (PT) must be 4 out of 10 or higher. EXTRAORDINARY EXAMINATION SESSION: In this session, none of the previously passed or compensated parts will be carried forward; consequently, only the assignment will be taken into account (in the same proportion as in the ordinary examination session). |
|||||||
| TOTAL: | 30 | ||||||
SECOND FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0341820 | Digital Transformation & Innovation | OB | 3 | ||
Digital Transformation & InnovationCódigo: 0341820 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives This module aims to familiarise students with the principles of digital transformation, the role that innovation plays in it, and the impact its implementation can have on the development of a business. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 The ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, which are intended, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG4 Ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG7 Ability to analyse and assess the social and environmental impact of technical solutions. CG8 Ability to organise and plan within the context of a company, and other institutions and organisations. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. Specific competences CE8 Ability to assess and identify the opportunities offered by continuous innovation in the field of mechanical engineering and to recognise the need for such innovation. CE30 Knowledge of the processes and strategies involved in the digitalisation of industry, including its causes, consequences, advantages and disadvantages. Learning outcomes LR1 Understanding the innovation management strategies currently applied in the field of mechanical engineering and recognising the need for them. LR2 To understand the advantages, disadvantages and consequences of industrial digitalisation processes, as well as the strategies to be adopted to ensure their successful implementation. Course description The need for continuous innovation in industry. Innovation management strategies. Digitalisation processes in industry: motivation, advantages and consequences. Strategies for implementing digitalisation in industry. Success stories. 1.1. What is Digital Transformation? 1.2. The Importance of a Digital Transformation Strategy 1.3. What Drives Digital Transformation? 1.4. The stages of digital transformation 1.4.1. Awareness phase: Presence and engagement 1.4.2. Planning phase: Formalising the change 1.4.3. Training phase: a change in strategy 1.4.4. Implementation phase: Innovation and adaptation 1.5. Barriers to Digital Transformation 2. Topic 2. Innovation and Digital Transformation 2.1. The Difference in a Digital World: Innovation vs Transformation 2.2. Disruptive Innovation 2.3. Design Thinking in Digital Transformation 2.4. Empathy 2.5. The Ideation Process 2.6. Prototype or Proof of Concept 2.7. How to Promote Innovation and Transformation in Business Training Activities A1 Classroom presentation of concepts related to the topics covered in each subject and problem-solving exercises that enable students to learn how to tackle them, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group discussions, etc. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be divided into two types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s individual study. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Assessment criteria: CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT will consist of two mid-term exams: the first, held around the middle of the term, covering the content of Topic 1; and the second, held in the final week of the term, covering the content of Topic 2. The average mark for both exams must be 5 or above to pass the module. For the REGULAR and SUPPLEMENTARY assessments, mid-term exam results are not carried over, and students are assessed on the entire course. |
|||||
| 0341822 | Elasticity and Strength of Materials | OB | 6 | ||
Elasticity and Strength of MaterialsCódigo: 0341822 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives As part of the progression towards understanding real solids, and building on the knowledge students have already acquired regarding rigid solids, this module introduces a further variable: deformation. This marks the transition from rigid solids to elastic solids, which are the subject of study within the field of elasticity. This branch of science, as such, involves a high degree of mathematical complexity. In the cases that typically arise, however, simplifying assumptions regarding elasticity may be made, followed by the application of a safety factor. This has given rise to the science of Strength of Materials, which is, in essence, a simplification of elasticity. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 Ability to draft, approve and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the legislation required for practising as a Technical Industrial Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE24 Knowledge and skills to apply the fundamentals of elasticity and strength of materials to the behaviour of real solids. Learning outcomes RA1 Is able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. RA11 Analyse and solve problems involving static and hyperstatic beams, trusses and frames, arches and rings subjected to external loads, taking into account the principles of strength of materials RA12 Calculate and analyse the deformation of columns subjected to buckling RA13 Understand and apply the theory of elasticity to the behaviour of elastic solids and real solids. RA14 Is able to carry out experimental tests in the laboratory using experimental methods for the analysis of stresses and strains Course content Constitutive equations of elastic solids. Behaviour of real solids. Buckling of columns. Plasticity. Anisotropy. Trusses and frames. Arches and rings. Continuous beams. Experimental methods for analysing stresses and deformations: Extensometry. Calculation of displacements and rotations. Topic 0: Prerequisite knowledge Topic 1: Continuous beams Topic 2: Truss structures: Trusses and frames Topic 3: Arches and rings Topic 4: Buckling of columns Topic 5: Constitutive equations of elastic solids: Elastic anisotropy Topic 6: Plasticity Topic 7: Behaviour of real solids Topic 8: Experimental methods for analysing stress and strain (Extensometry and Photoelasticity) Teaching activities A1 Classroom presentation of concepts related to the topics comprising each subject and problem-solving exercises enabling students to understand how to tackle them, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A2 Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems independently. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of learning outcomes can be categorised into three types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s individual study. - E2: Reports on laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Assessment criteria: Continuous Assessment: During the term, there will be two tests (Part 1 and Part 2), and students may pass through continuous assessment provided that they do not obtain a mark lower than 5 in any of the tests. − Test 1: 45%. − Test 2: 45% − Problem-solving: 10%. Regular Examination: For those who do not pass via continuous assessment, there will be a final exam covering the part not passed in the continuous assessment; this accounts for 90% of the final mark for the module (45% Part 1 and 45% Part 2). The remaining 10% corresponds to the mark for problem-solving tasks completed throughout the course. Resit: Students who do not pass the module in the Ordinary Assessment Period will sit a final examination covering the entire syllabus, which will account for 100 per cent of the final mark. |
|||||
| 0441512 | Computer-Aided Engineering. CAE | OB | 3 | ||
Computer-Aided Engineering. CAECódigo: 0441512 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives To provide future engineers with a comprehensive and professional overview of the technological tools available to them to assist in the design, calculation and simulation (CAD-CAE TOOLS) of mechanical assemblies, as well as specific training in some of these tools. Prerequisites Knowledge of the following subjects: Technical Drawing and Computer-Aided Design. Competencies COMPETENCIES Order CIN 311/2009 KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT C5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. SKILLS AND ABILITIES C6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. C8 Ability to apply quality principles and methods COMPETENCIES C1 Ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of industrial engineering which are intended, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. C4 Ability to solve problems with initiative, decision-making and creativity, and to use critical thinking; and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. C16 Ability to visualise in three dimensions and knowledge of graphic representation techniques, both through traditional methods of metric and descriptive geometry and through computer-aided design applications. C30 Knowledge and skills to apply engineering draughting techniques. C31 Knowledge and skills in the calculation, design and testing of machines. C33 Knowledge and skills to apply the fundamentals of elasticity and strength of materials to the behaviour of real solids. C36 Knowledge and skills in the application of materials engineering. C37 Applied knowledge of manufacturing systems and processes, metrology and quality control. Learning outcomes KNOWLEDGE AND CONTENT RK16 Possesses knowledge of IT tools enabling them to work with existing Computer-Aided Design (CAD), Computer-Aided Manufacturing (CAM) and Computer-Aided Engineering (CAE) software, and to integrate these into industrial design and product development. SKILLS AND ABILITIES RFS5 Has a command of various 2D and 3D design and drafting tools and programmes, including CAD, CAM and CAE, which help students to integrate this digital language, equipping them with the digital skills essential for their future careers, enabling them to communicate and test their designs. COMPETENCIES RFC3 Possesses an understanding of the principles of engineering design and analysis, as well as the scientific methodology for solving engineering problems in industrial design and product development, enabling them to innovate in the field of industrial design in real-world situations. RC13 Has a command of computer-aided simulation, CAD/CAM/CAE tools that enable them to analyse the behaviour of parts, sub-assemblies or mechanical systems in order to analyse the results and draw conclusions; to automatically manufacture prototypes so as to be able to communicate, manufacture and test their designs; and to programme simulation tools for manufacturing processes in order to optimise them. Course content Modelling of material behaviour. Simulation of mechanical elements based on the application of the finite element method (CAE) Analysis of static problems. Analysis of solid models and prototypes – data processing and interpretation Determination of stresses, diagrams, deformations and rotations. Kinematic and dynamic simulation of mechanisms. Topic 1: -MODELLING OF MATERIAL BEHAVIOUR. SIMULATION OF MECHANICAL ELEMENTS BASED ON THE APPLICATION OF THE FINITE ELEMENT METHOD (CAE). Topic 2: -ANALYSIS OF STATIC PROBLEMS. Topic 3: -DYNAMIC ANALYSIS OF ASSEMBLIES. -ANALYSIS AND MODELLING OF REAL STRUCTURES USING THE FINITE ELEMENT METHOD. Topic 4: -ANALYSIS OF SOLID MODELS AND PROTOTYPES -DATA PROCESSING AND INTERPRETATION. Topic 5: -DETERMINATION OF STRESSES, DIAGRAMS, DEFORMATIONS AND ROTATIONS. KINEMATIC AND DYNAMIC SIMULATION OF MECHANISMS. Training activities AP1.- Lectures Lecture-based sessions in which the theoretical content of the module is presented by lecturers who are experts in the subject, enabling the topics to be contextualised and addressed from a comprehensive perspective. AP3 – Workshop and/or laboratory activities Guided practical activities in which students learn by doing, with the aim of acquiring instrumental and hands-on skills and abilities relating to a specific topic. AP5 – Independent study, case studies or problem-solving, and literature reviews. Individual or group learning activities based on the course materials, case studies, problems and recommended reading for the modules. This includes reading and reviewing texts to deepen and broaden knowledge in the various fields of study, as well as activities complementary to such reading, such as comparing authors or critiquing articles. It also involves solving cases, problems and/or challenges deliberately designed to enable students to carry out an in-depth and comprehensive analysis of a real or hypothetical situation, with the aim of understanding it, interpreting it, resolving it, generating hypotheses, comparing data, reflecting, expanding their knowledge, diagnosing it and, on occasions, practising possible alternative solutions. AP6. Tutorials Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the approaches adopted by students in the course and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available at scheduled times, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, according to their needs. AP7. – Knowledge assessments An assessable learning activity designed to objectively determine the knowledge acquired by each student in a specific subject. It includes different forms of assessment (continuous and final). In other words, it allows for the continuous assessment of the acquisition of learning outcomes throughout the duration of the course, as well as a comprehensive final assessment. Furthermore, it involves calculating the time spent by the teacher and students on carrying out this type of activity in class. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to sit the continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment process will consist of verifying and evaluating the student’s achievement of the learning outcomes. To this end, the following assessment activities will be used to determine the extent to which each of the listed competences has been mastered, and these will consist of: SE1.- Practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) Assessment of the level of achievement of the learning outcomes (in terms of knowledge, skills and attitude) attained through the completion of individual and group practical activities (case studies, problem-solving and challenges, project work, oral presentations, debates, etc.) based on assessment rubrics and observation tools previously designed and published by the lecturer. All practical activities utilise resources provided by the virtual campus, which enables real-time interaction between students and the lecturer. Furthermore, this platform allows the submission of assignments and/or exercises via a dedicated inbox, facilitating the use of anti-plagiarism software. Furthermore, for each submission, students must attach a sworn statement or declaration of responsibility in which they guarantee the authenticity and authorship of the documentation/files submitted for assessment. Lecturers are allocated time to mark the submitted work and will ask follow-up questions, as well as engage with students to verify the achievement of learning outcomes, the development and authorship of each piece of work and/or exercise. Finally, face-to-face assessment activities involve student-teacher interaction not only for the final assessment of the subject, but also for continuous assessment. SE2. – Final knowledge assessments Objective knowledge assessments. These may be written or oral, essay-based, short-answer or multiple-choice, etc. SE3.- Laboratory practical booklet This assesses scientific and procedural knowledge. In the laboratory workbook, students record all relevant data from their research work in real time: questions, hypotheses, objectives, methods and materials, results and conclusions. Completing the workbook enables students not only to gather information about their research but also about their learning process. SE4. Portfolio Evidence of the student’s learning (in terms of knowledge, performance or output) is assessed; this evidence is compiled in a dossier, folder or portfolio throughout the course with the aim of explaining and reflecting on the learning that has taken place Assessment systems MINIMUM MAXIMUM SE1 Practical activities MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 60% SE2 Final knowledge assessments MINIMUM 30% MAXIMUM 60% SE3 Laboratory notebooks MINIMUM 0% MAXIMUM 30% SE4 Portfolio MINIMUM 10% MAXIMUM 30% To pass the module by sitting the continuous assessment tests, students must achieve a minimum of 3.5 marks in each one; otherwise, these marks cannot be averaged with the other marks obtained. |
|||||
| 0441513 | Final-Year Project | OB | 12 | ||
Final-Year ProjectCódigo: 0441513 Imprimir Course 4. Second-term module. Compulsory. 12 credits. Profesores
Objectives To undertake a Final-Year Project/Dissertation, as a comprehensive or synthesising exercise, under the academic supervision of a Supervisor or Tutor. Prerequisites To undertake the final-year project, students must have enrolled in all other modules of the degree programme. Competencies 1. To acquire the general skills and competences described in the degree objectives, together with specific career-oriented skills. 2. Independently acquire new knowledge and techniques suitable for the conception and development of a product in the field of industrial design. 3. To conceive and carry out projects in the field of industrial design, using the principles and methodologies specific to engineering. 4. To propose, analyse, validate, interpret, install and maintain industrially manufactured products in real-world situations. Learning outcomes COMPETENCIES RC6 Produce a final-year project report which is subsequently defended in detail, discussing all the work carried out during the time devoted to the project, including, amongst other sections, the background to the problem, the selection of alternative solutions, a detailed presentation of the solution implemented, conclusions and a bibliography. Description of the content Final-Year Project The Final-Year Project must demonstrate the student’s acquisition of the general and specific competences of the degree programme, summarising the competences acquired through the course, or take the form of an innovative project in one of the programme’s areas of competence, of sufficient complexity, in an environment as close as possible to real-world conditions. The student must produce a coherent piece of work, of a realistic duration in relation to the intended objectives. The aim is to produce an original piece of work, based on the student’s own research and personal contribution. If the project is of an experimental nature, analytical methods must form the core of the work, rather than a review of the literature, although the latter must never be omitted. Teaching activities P2. – Interactive classes Classroom activities with a practical and applied focus, in which students undertake an in-depth study of a specific subject. These activities encourage reflective and inquisitive participation from students. Depending on the objective, they may be used, amongst other things, to: • Contextualising, explaining and clarifying key content to ensure the successful acquisition of the competences for each subject. A critical approach is encouraged through reflection and the discovery of relationships between various concepts. • Presenting problems, case studies, challenges, projects or research questions. • Reviewing practical scenarios. • Oral presentations: presenting the results and conclusions of a research project; analysing and resolving case studies, results and problem-solving or challenges; presenting a project; presenting a prototype, etc. • Debates: structured discussions in which different opinions and viewpoints on a specific topic are presented and debated. Opinions must be properly substantiated, based on empirical data, studies, theories, etc., which enable the establishment of criteria for participation, the search for and presentation of information and data, in order to foster a dynamic and engaging dialogue. P6. Tutoring Sessions in which the teacher guides and advises students throughout their learning process. The teacher addresses theoretical or practical queries, monitors the methods used by students in the module and provides meaningful feedback. The lecturer is available during scheduled hours, which are communicated to the students, and students may attend voluntarily, according to their needs. Q8. Preparation of the Final Year Project Design, preparation and drafting of the Final Year Project report to be submitted to an Examination Board prior to the oral defence. P9.- Public oral defence of the Final Year Project Oral presentation of the Final Year Project prepared by the student, followed by a session to address any queries raised by the examination board. Assessment system and criteria SE5.- Assessment of the Final Year Project Report Assessment of the student’s written work based on a previously designed and published assessment rubric. The Final Year Project is an individual assignment on a topic chosen by each student, which may be theoretical, experimental or practical in nature. The aim of this project is to demonstrate a certain level of maturity in independently tackling a topic relevant to the degree programme. The project must be carried out under the supervision of an academic tutor from the University. The assessment concludes with an evaluation of the level of learning achieved by the student and is expressed as numerical marks, in accordance with current legislation. SE6. – Defence and presentation of the Final Year Project before the assessment panel Assessment of the oral presentation of the final-year project prepared by each student, as well as their responses to and explanations of questions or clarifications raised by the examination board, based on a previously designed and published assessment rubric. This project will be presented and defended individually, orally and in public, before a University Examination Board. Lecturers from other departments, degree programmes and schools within the same university, or from other universities, may be invited. - Assessment of the project’s stages by the project supervisor (2 progress reports) - Defence and assessment of the project before a panel of lecturers with expertise in the discipline in which it was carried out, in accordance with an assessment rubric: Overall assessment of the work: 20% State of the art and theoretical framework: 10% Methodology used: 10% Development of the work: 20% Formal aspects: 15% Final Year Project defence: 15% Impact of the final-year project: 10% |
|||||
| TOTAL: | 24 | ||||
Year 5
ANNUAL SUBJECTS
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0441808 | Machine Calculation, Design and Testing | OB | 6 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Machine Calculation, Design and TestingCódigo: 0441808 Imprimir Year 5. Annual module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives To acquire the knowledge and skills required for the calculation, design and testing of machinery. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 Ability to draft, approve and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the legislation required for practising as a Technical Industrial Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE22 Knowledge and skills relating to the calculation, design and testing of machinery. Learning outcomes RA1 Is able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. RA7 Identify the different components of machines and understand how they function within the context of a machine LR8 Is able to select the bearings and bushings for a machine in accordance with their technical specifications LA9 Calculate and select the appropriate flexible transmission for a machine in accordance with its design parameters RA10 Understand and apply the finite element method to the sizing of machine components by carrying out simulation exercises Course content Calculation, design and testing of machine components and machines. Bearings. Flexible power transmission systems: belts and chains. Computer-aided design (CAD) tools. Machine vibrations. The product development cycle: design, analysis and testing. Theory and practice of the finite element method. Application of the finite element method to mechanical analysis. Teaching activities A1 Classroom presentation of concepts related to the topics covered in each subject and problem-solving exercises to enable students to understand how to tackle these problems, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A2 Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually acquire the ability to solve problems independently. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of learning outcomes can be categorised into three types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s individual study. - E2: Reports on laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Continuous assessment will be determined in accordance with the following criteria: For skills involving knowledge of course content, a series of written examinations will be set to cover the content covered in classroom-based learning activities. All content will be assessed on a scale of 0 to 10. There will be two overall continuous assessment marks, one per term (C1 and C2), which will determine whether the student has passed the module without having to sit the standard final examination. In order for an average to be calculated between the two marks, each of them (C1 and C2) must be higher than 3.5. For the average of the two marks to constitute a pass via continuous assessment, it must be greater than or equal to 5.0. Each overall continuous assessment mark will be calculated as follows: • C1: Average mark for the examinations (80 per cent) and assignments (20 per cent) completed during the first four-month term. • C2: Average mark of: o C2T: Average mark for examinations (80%) and assignments (20%) completed during the second term. o C2P: Mark for the laboratory practicals completed. To be eligible for the C2 average, students must achieve a mark of at least 3 points in each of the two component marks, namely C2T and C2P. If this mark is not achieved in either of the two component marks, the student will not be eligible for a pass in the continuous assessment process. Students who have passed (a mark of more than 5 marks) the mark for the laboratory practicals undertaken, i.e. C2P, but have not achieved a pass in the continuous assessment process, may sit only the theoretical part of the exam for the ordinary examination session. Students who have passed (a mark of more than 5 points) the theoretical part, calculated as C1*0.6+C2T*0.4, but have not achieved a pass in the continuous assessment process, may choose to sit only the practical part of the examination corresponding to the ordinary examination session. The examination for the ordinary examination session (ECO) will be marked as follows: • Students sitting both the theoretical and practical parts: 100 per cent of the mark constitutes the final exam mark. • Students who sit only the theoretical part (they must have a minimum mark of 5 points in C2P): Ordinary examination mark = 75% ECO mark + 25% C2P • Students who sit only the practical part (they must have a minimum mark of 5 points in C1*0.6+C2T*0.4): Regular examination mark = 75% of (C1 × 0.6 + C2T × 0.4) + 25% ECO Students sitting the supplementary exam will be assessed on the entire syllabus for the module; no parts passed in previous examination sessions will be carried forward. The mark for the supplementary exam will be 100 per cent of the exam mark. |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 0441809 | Industrial Structures and Buildings | OB | 7,5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Industrial Structures and BuildingsCódigo: 0441809 Imprimir Year 5. Annual module. Compulsory. 7.5 credits. Profesores
Objectives The course will enable students to learn about and become proficient in the basic techniques involved in structural analysis. In addition, it will cover industrial buildings and their specific characteristics, as well as the most common construction solutions. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 The ability to draft, approve and develop projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the legislation required for practising as a Technical Industrial Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE25 Knowledge and ability to calculate and design industrial structures and constructions. Learning outcomes RA1 Is able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. RA2 Calculate and dimension hinged structures in accordance with criteria of stiffness and strength LR3 Understand and apply matrix methods to structural analysis. LA4 Understand the characteristics of industrial buildings and their structural elements LA5 Understand the types of ground and foundation systems according to their properties RA6 Understand the current regulations governing the construction of industrial buildings. Course content Structural analysis. Deformation energy method. Matrix method. General study of industrial structures and installations. Applications to industrial buildings. Current regulations. Analysis and design of structural elements for industrial plants. Characteristics of industrial buildings. Construction solutions. Learning activities A1 Classroom presentation of concepts related to the subjects comprising each module and problem-solving exercises enabling students to understand how to tackle them, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A3 Carrying out assignments in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials Assessment system and criteria The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be divided into two types: - E1: Written assessments throughout the semester, to assess the technical skills associated with the module acquired through the student’s individual study. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Assessment criteria: The module is divided into two blocks, the assessment of which is detailed below: − BLOCK 1: Structures − Test 1: Multiple-choice exam, accounting for 22%. − Assignment/presentation: To be carried out/presented in pairs. Accounts for 12%. − BLOCK 2: Structures − Test 1: Problem-solving and/or theory exam, accounting for 18%. − Test 2: Problem-solving and/or theory exam, accounting for 22% of the mark. − Test 3: Problem-solving and/or theory exam, accounting for 14% of the mark. − Test 4: Problem-solving and/or theory exam, accounting for 12% of the mark. To pass the module via continuous assessment, students must have obtained a mark of 3 out of 10 or higher in each of the sections (CONSTRUCTIONS/STRUCTURES), and an overall mark of 5 out of 10 or higher, with the weightings stated above. Students who, throughout the academic year, achieve a mark of at least 3 out of 10 in either of the sections (STRUCTURES/CONSTRUCTIONS) through continuous assessment may sit the ordinary examination (June) only for those sections in which their mark is below 3 out of 10. If they sit any of the sections in which they had previously achieved a mark equal to or higher than the minimum mark (3 marks), it will be understood that they are waiving the mark obtained through continuous assessment, which will be replaced by the mark obtained in the ordinary examination (whether this is higher or lower than the previous one). Students who do not achieve the minimum mark of 3 marks in any of the sections, or who obtain an overall average of less than 5 marks, must sit the supplementary examination, which will cover the entire course. "The format of the assessment tests may include multiple-choice questions, short-answer questions, essay questions, problem-solving tasks, case studies, laboratory tests or workshops, or the design of prototypes, products or models, to be completed in writing or orally. Where applicable, the coordinator will provide details of the type of assessment to be undertaken prior to the examinations taking place.” Timetable Click on this link to view the detailed timetable in Excel
Bibliography Basic: 1. Ramón Argüelles Alvarez... [et al.]. Steel Structures, Design: Basic Standard and Eurocode Madrid: Bellisco, 1999–. 0. ISBN: 8493000280 Supplementary: 2.- Heredia, Rafael de Industrial Architecture and Urban Planning: Design and Construction of Madrid: Polytechnic University: School of Engineering. 1981. ISBN: 8474840171 3.- Sisenando Carlos Morales Palomino; DESIGN OF INDUSTRIAL FACILITIES UNIT 0. ISBN: 9788436262711 |
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| TOTAL: | 13.5 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
FIRST FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0341815 | Internal Combustion Engines | OB | 3 | ||||
Internal Combustion EnginesCódigo: 0341815 Imprimir Course 5. First-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this module is to familiarise students with the theoretical and practical operation of the main types of internal combustion engines. To this end, the architecture of the engines is explained, the thermodynamic cycles that model the behaviour of both petrol and diesel engines are discussed, and the characteristic parameters of both are analysed. In addition, the course examines combustion processes, the pollutant emissions resulting from these processes, and the technologies available to minimise them. Course content The module is divided into six topics: Topic 1: Engine architecture Topic 2: Thermodynamic Cycles 2.1: Otto cycle 2.2: Diesel cycle 2.3: Dual cycle Topic 3: Engine Performance 3.1: Characteristic Parameters 3.2: Performance Curves Topic 4: Supercharging Topic 5: Combustion 5.1: Combustion in MIF 5.2: Combustion in MIE Topic 6: Emissions control systems Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be set out in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be categorised into three types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s individual study. - E2: Reports on laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Assessment criteria: The continuous assessment process consists of two mid-term exams, the content of which is as follows: - First exam: Topics 1 and 2 - Second exam: Topics 3, 4, 5 and 6 In addition, students must complete two laboratory practicals. Failure to complete the practicals will result in a mark of 0 for the laboratory practicals. The final mark will be: Final mark: 0.45 × Exam 1 + 0.45 × Exam 2 + 0.1 × Laboratory practicals In both the ordinary and supplementary examination sessions, partial marks are not carried over; students are assessed on the full course. Only the mark for the laboratory practicals is carried over if they have been passed. |
|||||||
| 0441810 | Advanced Technologies Applications in Mechanics | OB | 3 | ||||
Advanced Technologies Applications in MechanicsCódigo: 0441810 Imprimir Course 5. First-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this module is to introduce students to the latest technologies applied in the industrial sector. Course content Topic 1. Current state of technology Topic 2: Latest technologies applied to manufacturing Topic 3: Latest technologies applied to industry Topic 4: Latest technologies applied to design Topic 5: Latest technologies applied to product and process management. Assessment system and criteria Continuous assessment The following will be carried out: • Five group presentations, each accounting for 6% of the final mark. Total: 30% • Two multiple-choice mid-term exams, each accounting for 35% of the final mark (Total 70%). To pass the module through continuous assessment, students must achieve a weighted average (mid-term exams and presentations) of five out of ten or higher; however, the average can only be calculated if both mid-term exams are marked three out of ten or higher Regular examination session The exam will consist of two independently marked multiple-choice sections, each accounting for 35% of the final mark (Total 70%). Students who have scored less than three out of ten in the relevant mid-term exam are required to sit each part. The final mark will be the weighted average (including presentations), but the average can only be calculated if both mid-term exams have a mark of three out of ten or higher. The module will be considered passed if a final mark of five out of ten is achieved. Extraordinary examination session The exam will consist of two independently marked multiple-choice sections, each accounting for 35% of the final mark (total 70%). Students who have scored less than three out of ten in the corresponding mid-term or ordinary exam are required to sit each part. The final mark will be the weighted average (including presentations), but an average can only be calculated if both mid-term exams have a mark of three out of ten or higher. The module will be considered passed if a final mark of five out of ten is achieved. |
|||||||
| 0441811 | Materials Testing | OB | 4,5 | ||||
Materials TestingCódigo: 0441811 Imprimir Course 5. First-semester module. Compulsory. 4.5 credits. Profesores
Objectives To acquire the knowledge and skills required to apply materials engineering. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 The ability to draft, approve and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the legislation required for practising as a Technical Industrial Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE27 Knowledge and skills for the application of materials engineering Learning outcomes RA1 Is able to carry out experimental tests to determine the physical and mechanical properties of materials LR2 Is able to carry out non-destructive testing to identify defects in materials LR3 Is able to carry out experimental tests relating to the protection of materials against corrosion RA4 Is able to carry out experimental welding tests on test specimens and check for defects and their mechanical properties Course content Characterisation and selection of different materials through the following tests: determination of physical and mechanical properties (tensile, compressive, hardness, fatigue, torsion, impact), non-destructive testing (acoustic, magnetic particle, penetrant), metallography, degradation and corrosion (climatic chamber and salt spray) and protection (application of coatings), and defects in joints (welding, adhesives). List of results obtained from the tests. The detailed syllabus is set out below: - P1 Corrosion Protection. Application of Paints. - P2 Corrosion Protection. Protection Assessment. - P3 Non-Destructive Testing. Penetrant Testing. - P4 Non-Destructive Testing. Magnetic Particles. - P5 Manufacture of Laminates and Sandwich Structures in Composite Materials. - P6 Composite Materials Testing. - P7 Identification and Testing of Polymers - P8 Welding - P9 Welding II - P10 Concrete Mix Design - P11 Production of Standard Concrete Test Specimens - P12 Particle Size Analysis - P13 Instrumentation Training activities A2 Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems independently. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment system used to verify and evaluate the student’s acquisition of competences consists of: - E2: Laboratory practical reports to verify the acquisition of the competencies covered. Assessment criteria: The mark obtained through continuous assessment is calculated as the average of the marks awarded for the submitted practical reports. The minimum mark required in each report for continuous assessment to be taken into account is 3 marks. Students who do not pass through continuous assessment will have to sit the examination in the ordinary and/or supplementary examination sessions. |
|||||||
| TOTAL: | 10.5 | ||||||
SECOND FOUR-MONTH PERIOD
| Code | Subjects | Character* | ECTS | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0341823 | Hydraulic Machines | OB | 6 | ||||
Hydraulic MachinesCódigo: 0341823 Imprimir Course 5. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this course is to train students in the application of fluid mechanics to tackle problems of a distinctly industrial nature, primarily the transport and distribution of fluids. Furthermore, students will be able to analyse and simulate the behaviour of various hydraulic machines, primarily pumps and turbines, describing and analysing the behaviour of the different types of these machines. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 Ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the legislation required for practising as a Technical Industrial Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE26 Applied knowledge of the fundamentals of fluid-mechanical systems and machinery. Learning outcomes RA1 Understanding the operating principles of fluid-mechanical machines. LA2 Is able to size hydraulic pumps and turbines LO3 Is able to calculate and size a fluid system LA4 Is able to apply dimensional analysis and similarity principles when studying hydraulic machinery. LA5 Be able to carry out simulations of fluid-mechanical systems and machines, interpret the results obtained and draw conclusions RA6 Is able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. Course content The module is divided into nine topics: 0. Introduction and prior knowledge 1. Description of hydraulic machines 2. Energy balance in a hydraulic machine 3. General theory of hydraulic machines 4. One-dimensional ideal theory of hydraulic turbomachinery 5. Energy losses in pumps 6. Similarity of hydraulic machines 7. Selection and installation of pumps 8. Control of hydraulic pumps 9. Cavitation in turbomachinery Training activities A1 Classroom-based presentation of concepts relating to the topics covered in each subject and problem-solving exercises designed to enable students to understand how to tackle these topics, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A2 Laboratory activities of increasing difficulty, enabling students to gradually develop the ability to solve problems independently. A3 Carrying out projects in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be categorised into three types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s individual study. - E2: Reports on laboratory practicals to verify the acquisition of the skills developed. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Assessment criteria: Continuous Assessment: − Two mid-term exams (minimum mark 4) − Practical sessions: 10% − Final mark: 0.45 × Mid-term 1 + 0.45 × Mid-term 2 + 0.1 × Practical work Regular or resit examination: − Students may retake one or all of the mid-term exams in a final exam |
|||||||
| 0341824 | Thermal Machines | OB | 6 | ||||
Thermal MachinesCódigo: 0341824 Imprimir Course 5. Second-term module. Compulsory. 6 credits. Profesores
Objectives The aim of this module is for students to become familiar with the main types of thermal engines and to understand their operation and function in thermal power stations, Specifically, students will study gas turbines, steam turbines, combined-cycle plants, combined heat and power (CHP) plants and nuclear power stations, as well as being introduced to the basic principles of reverse cycles, including the vapour compression cycle. Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 Ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG9 The ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the legislation required for practising as a Technical Industrial Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE23 Applied knowledge of thermal engineering. Learning outcomes RA1 Understanding and applying the concepts of technical thermodynamics to the design of steam turbines RA2 Understand and apply the concepts of engineering thermodynamics to the design of gas turbines LR3 Understand the principles of cogeneration and their application to combined-cycle systems LA4 Understand and apply advanced concepts of engineering thermodynamics to the calculation of refrigeration cycles and heat pumps LR5 Understand the combustion technology and fuels used in thermal engines RA8 Is able to work as part of a team, apply critical thinking, make decisions and communicate knowledge and conclusions in the field of industrial engineering. Course content Steam and gas cycles. Exergy and exergy balance. Engine testing methods. Thermal cycles. Steam and gas turbines, combined cycle, cogeneration, refrigeration cycles and heat pumps. Combustion, fuels and power stations. Nuclear engineering. Course content: − Topic 1: Introduction to thermal machines. − Topic 2: Thermal cycles: power cycles and reverse cycles. − Topic 3: Thermodynamics of open systems. − Topic 4: Steam turbine power stations: Rankine cycle. − Topic 5: Gas turbines. The Brayton cycle. − Topic 6: Cogeneration and combined cycles. Gas-steam cycle. − Topic 7: Reverse cycles: refrigeration cycle and heat pump. − Topic 8: Combustion. Fuels and power stations. − Topic 9: Nuclear engineering. Nuclear power stations. Learning activities A1 Classroom presentation of concepts relating to the topics comprising each subject and problem-solving exercises to enable students to understand how to tackle them, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group work, etc. A3 Carrying out work in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials. Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be divided into two types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s individual study. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Assessment criteria: Continuous assessment consists of two exams: − Exam 1: Topics 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 − Exam 2: Topics 7, 8 and 9 Exam 1 accounts for 60 per cent of the mark and Exam 2 for 40 per cent. To pass the module, the average mark for the exams must be 5 or above, and each exam must have a mark of 3.5 or above. The exams will last approximately 2 hours. Students who wish to do so may undertake an assignment consisting of a report and a presentation (lasting around 10–15 minutes) on a topic related to the subject, to be delivered during the final week of term. This assignment may contribute up to 1 mark towards the final mark for the module. Grades from continuous assessment exams are not carried over, so the entire course is assessed in the ordinary June and extraordinary July examination sessions. |
|||||||
| 0441815 | Project Management in IC 4.0 | OB | 3 | ||||
Project Management in IC 4.0Código: 0441815 Imprimir Course 5. Second-term module. Compulsory. 3 credits. Profesores
Objectives In 2014, the Spanish Government launched the Connected Industry 4.0 (IC4.0) initiative, adding the concept of ‘connectivity’ to ‘industry’ – a key element in the digital transformation of industry and related services. IC4.0 defines a new concept that combines flexible production with the latest information and communications technologies. There are numerous technologies underpinning this concept: automation and robotisation of industrial processes, advanced distributed communications, artificial intelligence and cognitive machines, big data and data analytics, the Internet of Things, additive manufacturing, etc. This module aims to familiarise students with these concepts and equip them with a basic understanding of Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) and Lean Thinking in IC 4.0 environments. It also covers Agile methodologies and their applications in the field of . Prerequisites No prerequisites have been set. Competencies Basic and general learning outcomes CG1 The ability to draft, sign off on and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, which are aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this Order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 Ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG6 Ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG7 Ability to analyse and assess the social and environmental impact of technical solutions. CG8 Ability to organise and plan within the context of a company, and other institutions and organisations. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the relevant legislation in the practice of the profession of Industrial Technical Engineer. Specific competences CE32 Knowledge of data protection and IT security and their implications in the field of industrial engineering. CE33 Basic knowledge of PLM and Lean Thinking in connected industrial environments. CE34 Basic knowledge of Agile methodologies and their applications in the field of industrial engineering Learning outcomes LR1 Understanding the fundamentals of data protection and IT security and their implications in connected industrial environments. LR2 Understand the principles of PLM and Lean Thinking in connected environments, as well as those of MVP development. LA3 Understand the fundamentals of Agile methodologies and their scope of application in industry Course description Introduction to the framework of Connected Industry and the Internet of Things: data protection legislation, the fundamentals of IT security and blockchain technology. Principles of PLM and Lean Thinking in connected environments. The concept and development of MVP. Introduction to Agile methodologies. 1.1. Definitions of IC4.0 1.2. Key objectives of IC4.0 1.3. Main structures of IC4.0 1.4. Organisational models of IC4.0 1.5. Key applications and examples of IC4.0 2. Data processing 2.1. Legal aspects 2.2. IT security 3.1. Lean thinking 3.2. Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) 3.3. Agile methodology. Training activities A1 Classroom-based presentation of concepts relating to the topics covered in each subject and problem-solving exercises designed to enable students to understand how to tackle these topics, as well as other face-to-face group sessions such as discussion classes, group discussions, etc. A3 Carrying out assignments in small groups. A4 Independent study, report writing, practical work, etc., carried out by individual students or groups of students. A5 Assessment tests. A9 Tutorials Assessment system and criteria Without prejudice to any other requirements that may be specified in the relevant course syllabus, as a general rule, failure to attend more than 60 per cent of the course’s teaching activities—which require the student’s physical or virtual presence—will result in the loss of the right to continuous assessment during the standard examination period. In this case, the examination to be held during the official period set by the University will be the sole assessment criterion, with the weighting specified in the course syllabus. ---- The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences can be divided into two types: - E1: Written tests throughout the semester, to assess the technical competences associated with the module acquired through the student’s independent study. - E3: Problem-solving, completing assignments, drafting reports, and presenting and defending case studies or projects (either individually or in small groups). Assessment criteria: Continuous assessment will consist of two examinations: − Exam 1: 50% − Exam 2: 50% Students who do not pass the continuous assessment will sit an examination covering the entire module during the REGULAR and/or SUPPLEMENTARY examination periods. |
|||||||
| 0441816 | Final-Year Project | OB | 12 | ||||
Final-Year ProjectCódigo: 0441816 Imprimir Course 5. Second-term module. Compulsory. 12 credits. Profesores
Objectives To undertake a Final-Year Project/Dissertation, as a comprehensive or synthesising exercise, under the academic supervision of a Supervisor or Tutor. Prerequisites To undertake the final-year project, the student must have passed or be enrolled in all other modules of the degree programme. Competencies Basic and general competences CG1 Ability to draft, sign off and carry out projects in the field of mechanical technology within industrial engineering, aimed at, in accordance with the knowledge acquired as set out in section 5 of this order, the construction, refurbishment, repair, maintenance, demolition, manufacture, installation, assembly or operation of: structures, mechanical equipment, energy systems, electrical and electronic systems, industrial facilities and plants, and manufacturing and automation processes. CG2 The ability to manage the activities covered by the engineering projects described in the previous section. CG3 Knowledge of basic and technological subjects, enabling them to learn new methods and theories, and providing them with the versatility to adapt to new situations. CG4 The ability to solve problems through initiative, decision-making, creativity and critical thinking, and to communicate and convey knowledge, skills and competences in the field of Industrial Engineering. CG5 Knowledge required to carry out measurements, calculations, assessments, valuations, expert reports, studies, reports, work plans and other similar tasks. CG6 The ability to handle specifications, regulations and mandatory standards. CG7 The ability to analyse and assess the social and environmental impact of technical solutions. CG8 Ability to organise and plan within the context of a company, and other institutions and organisations. CG9 Ability to work in a multilingual and multidisciplinary environment. CG10 Knowledge, understanding and ability to apply the relevant legislation in the practice of the profession of Industrial Technical Engineer. CG11 Ability to apply quality principles and methods. Specific competences CE29 An original project to be carried out individually and presented and defended before a university examination board, consisting of a professional project in the field of specific Industrial Engineering (Mechanical) technologies, in which the competences acquired during the course are synthesised and integrated Learning outcomes RA1 Submission of a final-year project report consisting of a detailed account of all the work carried out during the time devoted to the project, including, amongst other sections, the background to the problem, the selection of alternative solutions, a detailed presentation of the solution implemented, conclusions and a bibliography Description of the course content This module is designed to assess the student’s acquisition of the general and specific competences of the degree programme through the design and development of a mechanical project of sufficient complexity, in an environment as close as possible to real-world conditions. Learning activities A6 Personalised supervision of the project to provide the student with the information needed to complete it in accordance with the objectives set out at the start of the project. A7 Independent work, research, writing, etc. A8 Presentation to the Examination Board Assessment system and criteria The assessment systems used to verify and evaluate students’ acquisition of competences may include: - E4 Presentation to a panel of lecturers. Assessment criteria: Assessment of the project’s stages by the project supervisor (2 Progress Reports). Presentation and assessment of the completed project before a panel of lecturers with expertise in the discipline in which it was carried out, in accordance with an assessment rubric. Assessment: − Overall assessment of the work: 20% − State of the art and theoretical framework: 10% − Methodology used: 10% − Development of the work: 20% − Formal aspects: 15% − Final Year Project defence: 15% − Impact of the final-year project: 10% |
|||||||
| TOTAL: | 27 | ||||||
*Character: BT: Basic Training, Ob: Required, Op: Optional
In the Double Degree in Industrial and Mechanical Design Engineering you will be trained to turn ideas into tangible projects, using technology with purpose and becoming a creative, autonomous, collaborative and passionate professional.
Some of our current projects:
You will be trained through the UAX Makers educational model, developed based on the needs of more than 50 leading companies from different sectors and which incorporates:
Studying at UAX, you will have at your disposal 25.000m2 of specialised laboratories, equipped with the latest technology and where companies such as TALGO, SACYR, Renault or Avanade carry out their own research projects in collaboration with students and professors.
These are some of the most outstanding facilities in the industrial area:
In addition to this, you will have at your disposal a multitude of workshops and complementary laboratories such as the computer lab, the hydrology and fluid mechanics lab or the electrical engineering and geotechnics lab, among others, to carry out personal projects and get the most out of your training.
At UAX you will feel connected to industry from the very beginning: Master classes, seminars or workshops will be part of your day-to-day life at the university .
As a maker engineer, you will have the opportunity to participate in real innovation projects with companies such as the launch of a microsatellite into space with the company B2Space.
You will be able to carry out external internships in leading companies and you will complete your training with visits to organisations and attendance at conferences that will keep you in direct contact with the big names in the sector.
Currently, UAX has collaboration agreements with companies of the stature of:
Studying Industrial Design Engineering + Mechanical Engineering you will have the help of Career Services, which provides you with the necessary infrastructure so that you can carry out internships in companies and institutions.
Find out what it’s like to study the dual degree in Mechanical Engineering and Industrial Design Engineering at UAX; be inspired by the creativity and ingenuity of our maker projects, and discover what life is like on our campus, which is brimming with activities and events to suit all tastes.
UAX MAKERS
Work on real-world projects with companies. The UAX Makers model is based on collaborative work between students who come together to tackle a real-world project. To this end, we bring together students from different degree programmes, fostering a diversity of approaches and teamwork as key to achieving the best possible solution.
It designs and manufactures aerodynamic winglets for 3-wheel motorbikes, following the actual MotoGP process of simulation, development and wind tunnel testing.
Creation of an autonomous electric vehicle for data collection from the virtual twin
En colaboración con estudiantes de Farmacia, hemos desarrollado propuestas de reforma y mobiliario específico para farmacias, mejorando la experiencia del cliente y la rentabilidad del negocio.
Diseño y lanzamiento de un microsatélite al espacio para el estudio del cambio climático
An innovative digital fabrication workshop aimed at expanding the learning of architecture, engineering and design students. Find out more
A space for innovation and advanced prototyping, designed to enhance applied learning amongst engineering students by fostering the development of real-world aeronautical solutions through experimentation, technology and collaborative work in multidisciplinary environments. Find out more
Still not sure?
We’ll help you find the programme that best suits your profile.
Professionals’ Council
D. from the Polytechnic University of Madrid, with more than 15 years of experience at UAX, where he combines teaching, research and academic management in the field of engineering.
Rector of UAX Mare Nostrum. Director of the School of Engineering, Architecture and Design. PhD in Civil Engineering. Degree in Environmental Sciences and Official Master's Degree in Environmental Engineering for professionals related to civil engineering and Industry. Consultant specialising in Civil Engineering and Environmental Engineering.
Extensive experience in public and private media. Teacher of Spanish for foreign learners, English, and communication skills.
PhD in Industrial Engineering from the ETSII-UPM in Thermodynamics in the field of energy. FPI grant in R&D project at INSIA, and stay at the INRETS research centre (France). Lecturer in Master's and Degree courses in Thermal Engineering related to energy and combustion engines. Lecturer in the Master's Degree in Renewable Energies in Thermodynamics and Heat Transmission and Emerging Renewable Energies and Storage.
A portfolio of some of our students’ work
This project proposes to reinvent the future of the brand without losing its essence, exploring the balance between design, sustainability and sportiness.
Improve the passenger experience by facilitating efficient, safe and ergonomic baggage storage. ergonomics.
A portable hydrator, designed to optimise space and weight for outdoor activities, allowing water to be filtered, stored and dispensed efficiently.
YatY is an infant automatic adrenaline injection device, used in the emergency treatment of anaphylactic reactions.
An elegant gravitational dispenser inspired by the ethereal structure of the Phallus indusiatus mushroom.
Because your child deserves an ally that gives them confidence in the most critical moments. With Zippy, transforming fear into safety is possible. Safe, easy and designed to protect the most important thing: their well-being.
Each meal becomes a sensory spectacle where light, steam and design amplify the emotions, transforming the act of eating into a multi-sensory experience that surprises and captivates.
Manual device designed to carry out cleaning and ironing tasks effectively and efficiently. In 50 years, homes will be more compact and space will be smaller. KeyClean is therefore ideal due to its small size. It can be used in any corner of the house.
We need to know a little bit about you so that we can provide you with a personalised service.
All fields are required
We have met with more than 50 leading companies to understand their needs and develop a Mechanical Engineering and Industrial Design programme that ensures the employability and success of all our students at this crucial stage.
Real projects with companies. You will work on innovation projects such as the design of the bodywork of a prototype in collaboration with Renault.
Google and Datahack certifications. You will receive official certifications in User Experience, Google Ads and Coding For the Industry.
UAX Skill School. You will be trained in analytical thinking, disruptive thinking, leadership, ethics and storytelling.
Scholarships and Financial Support for Studying at UAX
We know that studying is an investment. That’s why we want to remove financial barriers and make things easier for you. Fill in the form and let our advisers help you discover the scholarships, agreements and personalised financial support that best suit your situation.
Community of Madrid
Financial support for students with a disability of 33 per cent or more who are studying at universities or higher education institutions specialising in the arts in the Community of Madrid.
Ministry of Education, Vocational Training and Sport
Find out about the scholarships and grants offered by the Ministry of Education, Vocational Training and Sport, categorised by type and level of education.
Attracting Pre-doctoral Research Talent
Financial support for outstanding students who wish to carry out innovative research and contribute to the advancement of knowledge in their disciplines.
If you’ve already decided to take the plunge, enrol early and benefit from a direct grant. It’s a way of rewarding your commitment and giving you a head start in planning your future.
Students from Ibero-America
This programme is aimed at Ibero-American citizens or foreign nationals legally resident in countries within the OEI’s sphere of influence. The scholarship covers a 50% discount on the total tuition fees.
Students from Ecuador
This programme is aimed at citizens with Ecuadorian nationality and/or residence who wish to study an online master’s degree in Spain. The scholarship covers a 50% discount on the total tuition fees.
2025, 2nd Edition
Grants for students on higher-level vocational training, undergraduate, postgraduate or master’s programmes enrolled at Spanish universities with a Santander agreement. A financial supplement to support you whilst undertaking your work placements.
If you graduated from UAX and are now thinking of studying for a new degree, we want to continue supporting you. That’s why we’re offering you a 10 per cent discount on tuition fees.
If you have an immediate family member (up to the second degree of kinship) enrolled at UAX, you can benefit from a 5 per cent discount on tuition fees. Because studying as a family is even better.
Studying for two degrees at the same time is a challenge, and we want to support you. If you’re already at UAX and enrol on a second degree programme, you’ll be eligible for a grant towards your booking fee and tuition fees.
If you’d like to continue your studies with us and progress from vocational training to a bachelor’s degree, from one bachelor’s degree to another, or from a bachelor’s degree to a postgraduate degree, we’re here to support you with a grant covering up to 25 per cent of your tuition fees.
If you have a strong academic record, we would like to recognise your talent with a scholarship designed for new students. (Excludes the degree in Medicine).
If you’re a high-performance athlete, at UAX we want to help you balance your passion with your studies. We offer specific grants that can cover up to 50% of your tuition fees.
Recognised for helping to shape your career
The rankings place UAX amongst the best universities in Spain for graduate employability, innovation and an educational model that is closely linked to the world of work.
Forbes ranks UAX as the private university with the most graduates working in its area (nearly 90%), thanks to a unique educational model firmly linked to the labour market through more than 8,800 agreements with companies.
The prestigious ranking of the BBVA Foundation and the IVIE recognises us as the university with the best job placement in Spain 2023, consolidating our model focused on the real employability of our graduates.
The Coordenadas Institute of Governance and Applied Economics places UAX as the private university of reference in Madrid, highlighting our practical training model aligned with the reality of the market.
UAX obtains the highest rating of 5 stars and the overall "Excellent" badge for Employability, Teaching, Academic Development, Facilities, Online Teaching and Good Governance in the prestigious international QS Stars rating.
UAX is recognised as the second most innovative university in Spain, the only private university among the top three in the ranking. This recognition highlights our transversal commitment to AI and training in sustainability.
According to the Forbes 2025 List, UAX is positioned in the TOP 2 Spanish Universities in the adoption of Generative AI in the training of its students, developing innovative learning tools and models aligned with technological evolution.
The Double Degree in Industrial Design Engineering and Product Development + Mechanics combines creativity and innovation in product design with the technical and functional training of mechanical engineering. It is a degree aimed at training professionals capable of designing attractive, functional and technically viable products, understanding both the user experience and the industrial and mechanical processes necessary to manufacture and optimise them.
Career opportunities are very broad and multidisciplinary. Graduates can work in product design, industrial development, automotive, advanced manufacturing, mechanical engineering, technological innovation or prototype development. There is also demand in sectors such as mobility, household appliances, consumer technology, furniture and industrial machinery. This profile is especially valued by companies looking for professionals capable of combining design, functionality and technical engineering in the same project.
Ingeniería Mecánica aporta la capacidad de comprender cómo funcionan los productos desde el punto de vista técnico y estructural. Mientras Diseño Industrial se centra más en la experiencia de usuario, la innovación y el desarrollo conceptual, la parte mecánica permite analizar materiales, procesos de fabricación, comportamiento físico y viabilidad industrial. La combinación crea un perfil mucho más completo y preparado para liderar proyectos de diseño y desarrollo de producto de principio a fin.
Estudiar solo Diseño Industrial ofrece una formación más centrada en creatividad, innovación y desarrollo de producto desde una perspectiva de diseño. El doble grado añade una base técnica y mecánica mucho más profunda, permitiendo participar en decisiones estructurales, industriales y de fabricación. Esto amplía considerablemente las salidas laborales y permite acceder a proyectos más técnicos y complejos dentro del entorno industrial y tecnológico.
Yes, especially as companies are increasingly looking for hybrid profiles able to combine creativity and technical know-how. Today's industrial innovation requires professionals who understand both the design and the functionality and manufacture of products. Sectors such as automotive, sustainable mobility, consumer technology and advanced manufacturing demand profiles capable of developing competitive, efficient products adapted to market needs.
Es una titulación exigente porque combina dos áreas complementarias pero diferentes: la creatividad aplicada al diseño y la ingeniería técnica orientada a sistemas mecánicos. Requiere capacidad analítica, visión práctica y creatividad, además de constancia y organización. Sin embargo, muchos estudiantes destacan precisamente esa combinación como uno de los puntos más atractivos del programa, ya que permite desarrollar un perfil muy versátil y diferencial.
You can work in design and innovation departments, industrial companies, automotive, product development, mechanical engineering, advanced manufacturing or technology consultancy. There are also opportunities in industrial design studios, technology start-ups and companies focused on product innovation. It is a particularly useful profile in companies that develop physical products and need to integrate design, functionality and industrial production.
Salaries depend on the sector, experience and type of company. In Spain, a junior profile usually starts between €24,000 and €34,000 gross per year. In advanced industrial sectors, automotive or technology companies, salary progression can be rapid. Profiles specialising in product innovation, design engineering or industrial development tend to have a particularly favourable career progression due to the combination of technical and creative skills.
Yes, product design and mechanical engineering are areas with high international demand, especially in countries with strong technological and industrial industries such as Germany, Italy, the Netherlands or the United States. Many multinationals are looking for profiles capable of participating both in conceptual design and in the technical development and manufacture of innovative products. In addition, it is a highly adaptable training to different global industrial sectors.
Yes, especially if you are looking for training that combines innovation, creativity and applied technology. It is a very complete and differential profile within the current labour market, as it allows you to work both in product design and in technical and industrial areas. In addition, it offers good job opportunities, international projection and possibilities to participate in innovative projects related to industry and technological development.
Other related qualifications
Bachelor’s Degree in Industrial Systems Engineering
Includes a professional certificate
Start:
September
Length:
4 years
Degree in Aerospace Engineering
In collaboration with:
Start:
September
Length:
4 years
Bachelor’s Degree in Biomedicine
Includes a professional certificate in:
Start:
September
Length:
4 years
Bachelor's Degree in Industrial Design Engineering and Product Development
In collaboration with:
Start:
September
Length:
4 years
Degree in Mechanical Engineering
In collaboration with:
Start:
September
Length:
4 years
Degree in Industrial Electronics and Automation Engineering
In collaboration with:
Start:
September
Length:
4 years